172
BUSINESS AGRICULTURE MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING SERVICES HAND BOOK Get Up Its Time The Business Hand-Book For Uganda

AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    0

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

BUSINESSAGRICULTURE

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

SERVICES

HANDBOOK

Get Up Its TimeThe Business Hand-Book For Uganda

Page 2: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

BASIC INFORMATIONStart Your Own2

Disclaimer

The business ideas presented here are not a guarantee of monetary success. The information is based on research, examples, and advice from business experts, trade associations, and business owners. Every attempt was made to ensure accuracy, and neither the author nor the publisher can be held responsible for any errors or changing circumstances. All featured businesses, franchises, publications, products, services, and suppliers are mentioned here for informational purposes only. The inclusion does not represent an endorsement on the part of the author or publisher.

Page 3: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

3Start Your OwnBASIC INFORMATION

greeting ministry

Page 4: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

BASIC INFORMATIONStart Your Own4

Dear Reader,

The reduction of poverty is the most difficult challenge facing any country in the developing world where a substantial majority of the population is considered poor.

Sustainable economic growth – growth that is durable, environmentally friendly and widely supported and shared – is crucial in the structural reduction pf poverty. Without economic growth, policy aimed at alleviating poverty in developing countries will do little more than redistribute existing poverty.

Income growth widens people’s choices and is regarded as a key to poverty reduction. Improving the economic status of poor peo-ple allows them to increase their consumption and gives them additional means of production which are essential for food security, material prosperity and social status.

It is entrepreneurs who generate productive employment, that is employment geared to the production of goods and services for which there is genuine demand and which is not dependent on structural subsidies or protectionist measures.

Young people face significant barriers in starting a business and best practice shows that their success depends to a large degree on the extent to which a range of integrated services are available to assist business start-ups such as basic entrepreneurship skills training, access to workplace facilities, mentoring, post-business start-up counselling and even micro credits.

Youth share many of the problems the general population experience in small business development, such as the lack of business and management skills and abilities, inadequate, inaccurate or non-existent financial records, an inability to cope effectively with fluctuating costs and prices, and taking too much money from the business for personal uses. In addition, many young men and women have limited language and communication skills, as well as poor education which can affect their ability to deal with numbers (e.g., book-keeping and stock-control), as well as face the challenge of their age, limited life and work experiences; limited financial resources, limited business networks and contacts, limited exposure to relevant role models, and age discrimination.

Furthermore, young people also often lack the necessary skills to develop their business ideas, such as performing a market analysis, differentiating their product or service from the competition, preparing cash-flow statements and bookkeeping.

Therefore, this booklet was developed in order to assist young people in identifying self-employment opportunities for young people in how to start a business, and introduces about 145 business ideas in the fields of agriculture, manufacturing/processing and ser-vices.

DR. CHARLES KWESIGA, EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR UIRI

Telephone: 256-041-285689/286245 MINISTRY OF TOURISM, Fax: 256-041-286695 TRADE AND INDUSTRYE-mail: [email protected] P. O.BOX 7086 KAMPALA, UGANDAIN ANY CORRESPONDENCE ON THIS SUBJECT PLEASE QUOTE NO.

Uganda Industrial Research Institute

Page 5: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

5Start Your OwnBASIC INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION 6

WHAT IS BUSINESS 6

KNOW YOURSELF 7

YOUR OWN BUSINESSES 8

MARKETING 9

MARKETING STRATEGY 10

RESOURCES 12

OTHER CONCERNS 12

STRUCTURE OF BUSINESS 13

MANAGEMENT PLANS 13

THE BUSINESS PLAN 16

A HEALTHY BUSINESS 17

START-UP CHECKLIST 17

FINAL REMARK 18

GLOSSARY 18

AGRICULTURE 22

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING 34

SERVICE 95

CONT

ENT

Page 6: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

BASIC INFORMATIONStart Your Own6

1 INTRODUCTIONMany of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps you want to:

• be your own boss • create your own job• introduce a new product• introduce a new service• make a better use of your skills and knowledge.

While these are all valid reasons to want your own business, it has to make sense for you.

There is no simple model for launching a successful business – each one is as unique as its owner.

However, there are several practical steps you can take to ensure you give the business a solid foundation from which to build.

Before venturing into the world of entrepreneurship and self-employment, you will need to do your homework: know yourself and know your market.

2 WHAT IS BUSINESSA business is simply a profit generating activity. It can be found wherever people need to buy things, or have things done for them. There are three main types of business: retail, manufac-turing and services. The community has to accept, and should be willing to pay for the product or service provided. The product or service should bring financial benefits to the owner.

2.1 RetailWhen you sell things that other people have made, you have a retail business. You could sell clothes, food or furniture to the public from a shop, a market stall or from your home.

2.2 ManufacturingA manufacturing business is when you make things to sell to your customers. You might make candles, clothes, crafts or furniture. Your customers may be shops or other places that give you orders.

2.3 ServiceA service business is when you sell your time and your skills to another person or company. For example, you may repair bicycles or type letters.

2.4 Sizes and Shapes of Businesses• Medium (51 – 100 employees)• Small (11 – 50 employees)• Micro (10 or less employees)• run by many people or by just one• based in urban or rural areas

2.5 Business in the Community• It is important to support the small businesses close to where you live • Small businesses help to keep the community strong• When you do business in town you have to travel. This costs you money. Many local businesses can offer the service cheaper, and you won’t have travel costs• Local people probably know what you need. They live the same kind of life that you do• When you buy in your own community, you help to keep money in the area. This is good for everyone

2.6 Advantages for the Community• A small business can give a customer personal service. It can make a product or provide a service that is exactly right for the customer

• Small businesses give more people a chance to be part of the economy

• Small businesses can provide goods and services locally. For example, fresh vegetables, repairs, hairdressing and transport services

Page 7: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

7Start Your OwnBASIC INFORMATION

3 KNOW YOURSELFFirst, you need to assess your own capabilities, resources and characteristics. This will help you to focus on your strengths as well as identify the additional tools, resources and skills you will need!

3.1 Time and Patience • Do you have the time and patience to take care of a business from the ground up? • Starting a business requires careful planning and preparation • Are you prepared to work long hours and make many sacrifices?

3.2 Commitment, Initiative and Motivation • Are you committed to make your business work? • Do you get frustrated and discouraged easily? • Do you like taking the initiative and making decisions? • Do you have the creativity to solve problems or know when to ask for help? • Do you have plenty of initiative and drive to make it through the start up phase? • A business needs constant care

3.3 Flexibility • Are you prepared to get through the highs and lows of business, when circumstances could change almost daily?• Are you prepared to be flexible and adapt to new conditions?• Have you considered that you may have to get used to an unpredictable income?

3.4 Risk Tolerance • Do you understand the risks involved in starting a new business? • Are you aware of the consequences of failure? • While there may be potential for high earnings there is also potential for financial loss if your venture does not succeed • Are you willing to take the risk?

3.5 Skills and Expertise • Do you have the necessary knowledge and skills?• Are you equally at ease in a leadership role as you are about paying the invoices and doing the filing? • Do you have a solid understanding of your market and your product or service? • Do you have superior organisational and management skills?• Do you have knowledge and skills in the areas of production, sales, marketing, and financial and administrative management?

3.6 Personal / Family Considerations• Earning income and even making a profit will take some time. • Both you and your family should agree that this is exactly what you want to do, and understand how much time, money, effort and personal sacrifice is required.• You may have to endure a lot of stress and a heavy wor kload

Page 8: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

BASIC INFORMATIONStart Your Own8

3.7 Personal Questionnaire

yes noDo you have a passion for your business idea?Are you willing to spend time and money to make your idea work?Do you like to make your own decisions and try your own ideas?Do you enjoy being challenged and thrive on competition?Is common sense is one of your strong points?Do you have will power and self-discipli-ne? Do you get things done on time and plan ahead?Do you like to work and understand that your own business requires you to work harder and longer – 12 to16 hours a day, probably six days a week, maybe even on holidays?Do you have the energy to do all the work involved – lifting, working in a shop, standing, walking, talking, smiling, driving – that the day-to-day operation of this business will require?Do you realize you can’t be all things to all people at all times, although this will be expected of you in your business? Can you withstand the strain this will create for you?You don’t know everything. Are there are still things to learn, new ideas for you to consider? Can you take advice from others?Are you adaptable, and not so rigidly bound to routine that you cannot change if the business changes?

3.8 Take into Consideration If you do not answer yes to all questions, it does not mean you are not meant to be a businessperson. It only means that you should think hard about the questions you answered “no” to, and spend more time preparing yourself to handle any problems you might have once you start your business.Furthermore, if you have to upgrade your knowledge or skills, do consider taking some courses.

4 YOUR OWN BUSINESSESOpening your business is like going on a journey. You must decide where you are going, and then when and how you want to get there. Before you start, you will need to have a good idea of a business you could start on your own.

• The Business Idea This should be something that your community needs.

• The Market Who will buy the products/services that your business will offer? You will need to research the market.

• The Resources You will need to think about resources like information, other people, space, time, tools, and transport.

• Other Things to Consider You will need to consider other things that will affect your business, e.g. how to give a good service, how to handle family pressures or even crime.

• Think Carefully about Money When you plan your business it is important to think very ca refully about money. You need to work out how much money you need to start and run your business. You must also think about any problems you may have with money.

4.1 Business IdeasBusiness ideas should come from your observations. To find a potential opportunity, try to forecast what people or other busi-nesses might want or need. In simple words, find a need of the community that is not satisfied yet.

Page 9: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

9Start Your OwnBASIC INFORMATION

Business ideas are often developed from a person’s education and experience. By considering your natural talents and skills, and the sources of enjoyment in your life, you may find the seed for a good business idea. You may think that your experience restricts you to starting a business in a particular field. For in-stance, if you have worked in a restaurant for 10 years, you may believe that your business must be in catering. However, do not rule out applying your acquired skills in a variety of ways. While there is always a learning curve, good management skills can be transferred to virtually any business.

4.2 How Many Ideas Do You Need? Before you decide what business you are going to open, you should have quite a few different ideas. Some of your ideas might be good, but they may not make money. You must also have abilities or skills to make your business progress. Think of as many ideas as you can, then try to match them with your skills and your strengths.

4.3 Your Strengths and WeaknessesIt is important to know your strengths and weaknesses before you start your business. • Your strengths can help you build your business• Your weaknesses may cause problems unless you find ways to deal with them

4.4 Skills • What skills do you need to run your business well?• Do you have these skills?• Do you know someone who can teach you these skills?• Do you know a training institution that could educate you on the needed skills?

4.5 Getting Advice• Do you know enough of business to be able to plan properly and use your resources?• Are there people in your family or community who already have a business that is doing well? - Could they help you? - Could they advise you on your business idea? - Could they help you to avoid some of the mistakes that many other people make in business. - Will they charge you for their advice?

4.6 Take into Consideration • Your first idea is not always the best one • Be creative • Try to think of at least three business ideas

5 MARKETINGMarketing is the effort to identify and satisfy customers’ needs and wants. Therefore marketing is not only market research, but this plays a vital role.

Within the marketing mix, five components are typically identi-fied:

5.1 Product / Service• Exactly what the customer wants, what they are looking for• The product/service offered to the market at the right time

5.2 Place

• The place is not simply the location, but it is also the physical infrastructure• The place should be clean, neat and convenient

5.3 Price

• People do not always buy the cheapest product • They want value for money

5.4 Promotion• The activities which communicate the benefits of the goods/ services to potential customers• The better you communicate to your prospective customers, the more business you will receive• Paid promotion is also called advertising

5.5 People• Make sure you are selling to the right people• Over 90 per cent of personnel come into contact with customers• Highly motivated and qualified staff are the key for customer care

Page 10: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

BASIC INFORMATIONStart Your Own10

5.6 Market Research Market research is getting information to help you understand what customers want and to help you promote your business.

5.7 Define Your Market• Identify the people who may be your customers - those who you believe will buy your products or service?• Group them according to age, sex, economic status, buying habits and other criteria• Where do your potential customers live (parish, district, region)?• What product or service do they want?• How are they currently being served?• What kind of goods or service would they like? (Consider different times of the month, and different times of the day)• What kind of problems do the people have with the goods or services they use? • Are there any ways to provide a better service?• How often would people buy these goods and services?• How much money would the people like to spend for the goods or services? • What would be the appropriate price range?• From where will you do your business? From home, a hired premises, or walking from house to house?• When are you most likely to do business?

5.8 Define Your Competition• Who are your competitors? • How and why will you compete with them?

You might not be able to answer all these questions, but as you get your information, it will help to guide you to the right people.

5.9 Take into Consideration • If you do not have a market, you do not have business.

5.10 Testing the MarketIt is usually good to test your ideas on the market before starting full production. Placing your product sample in a few stores or offering your services on a limited basis will allow you to find out how your potential customers will react.

• Was your product well received? • Why did people like it? a. Quality b. Design c. Material d. Finishing e. Packaging f. Price

• Why did people not like it? a. Quality b. Design c. Material d. Finishing e. Packaging f. Price

6 MARKETING STRATEGYAfter you have done your market research, you can begin planning your strategy. Incredible variety exists in the market, and it is up to you to find the position of your product/service as opposed to your competitors’. You need to consider the appearance, promotion, pricing and distribution.

How you market your product/service will depend on the type of business you are in and how much money you have to spend. Every business will have a different marketing strategy, but there are still some common elements.

6.1 Your Product/Service• What are you selling? • How will it be different from what your competitors are offering? • What about your customer service guidelines? • Will you provide a proper service?

Page 11: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

11Start Your OwnBASIC INFORMATION

6.2 Market• How extensive is it? • Is it a growth area? • Where does your business fit in? • How much of the market can you realistically capture?

Where you locate your business depends on the nature of your product/service and who your potential customers will be. For example, if you wish to open a retail store, your major concern should be to locate it in a central place that your custo-mers can easily reach.

If you want to manufacture handicrafts, your choice of a proper location should depend on:• where your suppliers are• where you can easily get your raw materials from• where your potential customers can easily get to• what kind of transportation is available• where the required skilled labour is available• What kind of skilled labour you need for your business.

6.3 Office and LocationIn addition to the location, you will also need to think of what kind of facilities you will use for your business.Some businesses rent a space. If you want to do this, it is important to seek advice for the lease agreement (rental con-tract). It is useful to determine whether the rent is high or low compared to others already renting similar places and whether you have the right to expand the premise etc.

Some people rent or buy existing premises and modify them according to their needs, or even acquire plots and build their own premises. If you want to do this, you should know that there are governmental regulations that you will need to follow.

Where will your business be located? Will you go to your custo-mers or will they come to you? Ultimately, a location will depend on the needs of your busi-ness, where your customers and competitors are, and such things as taxes, noise and environment. For certain types of business, an appropriate location is critical.

6.4 PromotionTrying to know everything about your future business also means thinking about how to ensure that potential customers get to know about your product /service.

• How will your potential customers find out about your business? • Will you promote it actively, or will you only rely on word of mouth? • What about the budget? • How does the competition do it? • How about radio and print advertising? • What about trade shows, Internet or free publicity opportunities?

Some examples of Advertising Media• Word of mouth• Newspapers, Flyers and posters • Distributing brochures• Loudspeaker announcements• Announcements on the radio• Using vendors and shops to display sample products• Participating in fairs and trade shows

6.5 DistributionWhen thinking of a good distribution plan, your aim should be to ensure that your customers receive your product or service promptly, with minimal costs to you.

• How will you distribute or deliver your product or service? • Will your customers come to you or will you go to them? • What type of transportation will you require to get your product or service to your customers?• Will you sell directly to customers or use indirect methods (through a distributor or retailer)?• How much time will it take to deliver your product or service?• How much will it cost you to distribute your product or service?

Page 12: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

BASIC INFORMATIONStart Your Own12

6.6 Smart Marketing• Make sure you have a clearly defined market that you know well.• Find your niche within the market.• Know your customers. Identify their needs and meet them more effectively than the competition.• Service is the key. Be reliable, responsive and competent. Make sure your customers are satisfied and keep coming back. Happy customers are your best advertising.• Price strategically. Attract customers but know your break- even point – the unit cost of production against the price you need to charge to recover the cost.• Do not be shy. Promote your business.• Customers deserve a greeting; service with a smile is always appreciated.• Customers deserve attention – try not to keep a customer waiting. If you are busy, tell them you will help them as soon as possible.• Customers deserve the best service. Fast, high quality service will mean that your customers come back to you again.• Customers deserve good quality products/services, because they pay money for what they buy.• Customers deserve fair prices. If your prices are fair and your product is high quality, your customers will buy from you regularly.• Never promise a customer something if you are not sure that you will be able to get it for them. If you do this, your customers will get angry and will not come back. If you are not sure, tell them that you will do your best to get it for them.

7 RESOURCESResources are the important things you need to run a good business. When all your resources are working well together, you should be able to run a successful business.Your time is a very important resource for your new business, and running a business can take up a lot of your time.

7.1 Take into Consideration• How much time will you need to run your business?• Do you have any other work? • Will you have to stop doing this work to give your new business the time it needs?• Will you still have time for yourself, your family and friends?• Will you be able to do everything yourself, or will you need additional help?• Do you have any other important things in your life now? • Are you willing to stop them if you get too busy?

7.2 Others• Do you need transport? • Will you need to collect or deliver any goods?• Do you have a place to run your business?• Do you have the tools and equipment required for your business?• Can you store the equipment needed for the processing of the products?• Can you store the products?• Are you going to need space to sell your products?• Are you planning to work outside, and what will happen if it rains?• If you do not have the tools or equipment you need, can you buy them, borrow them or rent them?

8 OTHER CONCERNS8.1 FAMILY PRESSURES

Many people who start their own businesses do it because they have families to support. Sometimes it is hard to run a business and look after the family. Often the family expects them to spend all the money they make on household needs.

What Can You Do? • Try to plan your day. You need to make time for your work and for your family• Pay yourself a realistic salary. Separate your income from the business income. Explain to your family that the money you make must be used in the business so that it can grow. This is true even when your business makes a lot of money.• Do not give family members anything free – they must pay like everyone else.

Page 13: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

13Start Your OwnBASIC INFORMATION

8.2 CRIMEMany businesses close down because of crime. Women who sell in the streets are often robbed, and sometimes assaulted. Many business people are killed when their stores are robbed.

What Can You Do?• The community needs to take a stand against crime. You can work with other business people to come up with safety plans.• Above all, it is important to educate the community.• The community needs to know that local business is important and that crime hurts everyone. • Never buy stolen goods. • Someone may have died when these goods were stolen. • Teach others that it is a crime to buy stolen goods. It also encourages criminals to commit more crimes. • Involve all members of the community, and come up with ways to deal with crime in your area.

9 STRUCTURE OF BUSINESS9.1 Sole Proprietorship

If you choose to own your business by yourself and use your own money (or a loan) to start it, your business will be known, legally, as a “sole proprietorship”. You are then the sole proprietor or owner, and will have complete control over the business. However, you will also be responsible for paying any debts and meeting claims against your business. This form of business is easy to start and there are no complicated Govern-ment regulations to follow.

9.2 General PartnershipWhen two or more people bring together their money and skills to start a business, it is known, legally, as a general partner-ship. This is also easy to start. A written agreement between the partners is not required. Nevertheless, if you choose this form of business it will be wise to have a solicitor prepare a contract that clearly states the rights and duties of each part-ner. In case of debt or claims against the business, all partners are responsible.

9.3 CooperativesA business started by ten (10) or more individuals who contri-bute their skills and money for the betterment of their economic condition is known as a Cooperative Business.

10 MANAGEMENT PLANS10.1 Management

Good bookkeeping procedures are critical to a successful busi-ness, and they should be in place before you begin. Bookkee-ping is the process of keeping your accounts. Your accounts tell you how much your business owes, how much it is owed by others, and what your earnings are. In addition to helping you measure your progress, the accounts enable you to comply with tax codes.Internally, accurate records help you plan for your company’s growth and to determine trends in your business. Which customers contribute more to your company than others? Why does it cost more today than yesterday to generate the same amount of revenue? Why did revenues go up this month as compared to the same month last year?Finally, with accurate financial records, you can tell if your busi-ness is meeting the objectives set out in your business plan.

10.2 Managing Your BusinessManagement is simply the way you take good care of your business and its day-to-day operation in order to make it a profit-making venture.

The history of small business failure reveals that most of them fail because of poor management. To manage your business properly, you should:• have a good financial plan from the very beginning• know how and where to buy all the supplies you need• know the best way to protect your products and avoid any wastage and stealing• try to cut down expenses needed to run the business on a day-to-day basis• know how to relate to your employees in order to ensure the smooth running of your business

Page 14: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

BASIC INFORMATIONStart Your Own14

• make your place of business attractive, without having to spend too much money on decorating• minimize credit to customers. (If you have to give credit, then you should know how to collect your dues without necessarily offending your customers.)• know how to price your product and expenses to make a profit in the end.

10.3 Take into Consideration• Keep track of day-to-day operations • Track your statements to know how you are doing and if you should make adjustments (financial analysis)• Plan for the future (financial forecasting)

10.4 EmployeesYou may need employees immediately or wait until the busi-ness is established before you hire people. In either case, employees present a number of issues - qualifi-cations, compensation, training, salaries and benefits, payroll, taxes and accounting, and employment legislation. Getting the right people to work with is important; try to hire people who complement your skills.

10.5 Company Name and IdentityYou need to choose a name for your business, but ensure that it is not already in use. You also need to consider the image you wish to project on your business cards, signage, invoices, envelopes and letter-heads.

10.6 Legal IssuesWhat regulations must your business abide by?Legal issues vary from business to business, and from place to place. Governments and trade organisations can provide general information.In any case, every new business owner must obtain different licenses and permits before opening for business.If your business idea is good and you have thought of how you will market and promote your product and where you will locate the business, you will still need to know how to finance the business, and how you will manage it.• Registration with the Ministry of Trade• Certificate of incorporation• Inspection of the premises and occupational certificate• Registration with tax authority

10.7 Financial PlanThe best way of starting your own business is to use your own money. It is very important that you work on a good financial plan. This plan should include accurate calculations of all the money you will need to cover start-up costs and all operating expenses until your business starts to show a profit.

Your start-up costs could include: • down payment on the purchase of premises or deposit for renting• costs of fixtures for and remodelling of premises • electricity, water and telephone expenses• purchase of equipment and machinery• purchase of raw materials• initial stock of goods • advertising and promotion• professional services (accountants, lawyers etc.)• stationery and other supplies• taxes and licenses• travel and transportation expenses

Operating costs will include salaries for yourself (as the owner/manager), and any employees you might have, and all the day-to-day expenses needed to run your business until it shows a profit.

Since it takes several months before most businesses start to show profits, it is very important that you put enough money aside to cover your operating costs for at least three months.

10.8 Insufficient Financing An important aspect of your financial plan is proper record keeping. This involves having:• a cash book (to keep a daily summary of cash receipts taken from sales)• a purchase book (to show all supplies received, accounts payable and cash available for future purchases)• a wages book (to record number of hours or days worked by employees, salaries paid and any deductions withheld)• a debtors account receivable record book for credit sales• an expenses book (to record all expenses such as rent, wages and accounts payable)

An accountant can help you set up the proper books.

Page 15: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

15Start Your OwnBASIC INFORMATION

10.9 PricingHow will you price your product? You will need to build in the costs of raw materials, labour and overheads, as well as an anticipated profit margin. What will the price say to customers about your product or ser-vice? I.e., will your product/service come across as moderately priced or inexpensive? Will your price be competitive?

In order to determine the right price for your product or service, you will need to know:• what other businesses charge for similar products or services• how much your potential customers will be able to pay• what the costs will be for production, management and marketing• how much profit your business will need to earn after covering all other costs

In business, money moves in two directions. When money comes into your business, it is called “income”. When you pay money out of your business, it is called “costs”. For your business to make money, your income will need to be more than you pay out in costs.

Before you open your business, you can estimate how much your business will make (income). You can also estimate how much your business will cost you. An estimate means the amount of money you think your business will make or cost you.

Production Costs + Marketing Costs = Total Cost of Product

Production Costs including:• Raw materials• Machinery and equipment • Rent, electricity, water• Labour

Marketing Costs• Packaging• Transportation• Promotion and Advertising

Profit Margin How much extra money will your business need to function properly and to progress?

Total Cost of Product + Profits = Sale Price

10.10 IncomeIncome is the money customers pay you for the service or goods that you provide. It is difficult to guess exactly how much you will sell, and how much you will charge. Many people guess too high, and then find out that their business fails. At the beginning, it is better to guess that you will have only a few customers.

• First, you need to work out how many customers you think you will have.• You will also need to write down how much you will charge for goods or services.• Then you need to multiply these figures to find out how much you will earn in the month.

10.11 Monthly Running costsMonthly running costs include the normal monthly costs of running your business, like rent, phone and electricity bills. They also include salaries (Your own and other salaries) and the costs to replace things you have used in the business.

You may find that your costs are more than your Income. Then you need to think how you can change your business plan. You need to find a way to make more income and/or to spend less money. Otherwise, you may find your income is more than your costs. Well done!

10.12 Paying back a loanIf you need to pay back a loan, you must add the amount to the monthly running costs.

Page 16: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

BASIC INFORMATIONStart Your Own16

10.13 Start-up costs These are the costs to start your business. You usually only have to pay them once. You may need to pay a deposit on the rental of a shop, or pay to put in a telephone. You may have to buy some equipment or machinery that you will use for a long time.If you do not have enough money to pay these start-up or running costs, you might have to borrow it. Then you will need to pay the loan back each month. You will also have to pay interest each month until you have paid the loan back.

11 THE BUSINESS PLANJust as you need a map to help you find the route to an unknown destination, you need a plan to help you determine in which direction to go to get your business up and running. A written document explains your overall strategies and objecti-ves in words and numbers.

Your first plan should estimate your goals, your expenses, and how much you plan to charge for your services, as well as show how you plan to attract and keep customers.

After you actually begin your business, you will find that the plan needs to be reviewed on an on-going basis. A business plan is a changing, dynamic document.

The business plan can be used for different things: e.g. for raising finance, for monitoring progress and business growth and for checking where mistakes have been made.

A good business plan can help avoid mistakes and will help you grow and to focus the business.

There is no right or wrong way to write a business plan, but you must write one. Putting your plans on paper takes your dreams of owning a business and begins to turn them into reality.

There are no guarantees that your business will succeed, but a well written and well researched business plan plays an essential role in a business’s success.

Proper planning for your business• Financial• Operational• Marketing• Managerialis the key to turning your idea into reality.

In your business plan you should detail:

1. who will own the business 2. who will manage the business3. the product(s) and/or service(s) you will offer4. the materials and resources you will need 5. your strengths and weaknesses 6. short and long-term plans of the business 7. the market and industry at which your business is directed (including suppliers, customers, competitors, threats and opportunities)8. marketing, sales and production plans9. operating costs10. the amount, sources and types of financing it may require, including personal11. sales and cash flow forecasts

You may require the assistance of an adviser or businessper-son. Ultimately the plan should reflect your own thinking. Remem-ber, business planning is a continuous process.

Page 17: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

17Start Your OwnBASIC INFORMATION

12 A HEALTHY BUSINESSBuilding a business is truly an exciting prospect. Once your business is up and running, the challenges certainly do not stop.

• Running a small business is a life-long learning process. Nothing will remain static! Know where you are going and constantly keep on top of things. With the right tools and knowledge, you will be better able to manage change.

• Develop and maintain good relationships with your suppliers, associates and employees. Communication is the key to building solid relationships.

• Be upfront. If you run into a cash flow problem and cannot meet a payment or pay an invoice, take the initiative with your supplier. This will build a stronger rapport. Broken promises erode trust.

• Look after daily financial tasks such as bookkeeping: your business depends on it.

• Make cash flow projections; be sure to note the outcome of any possible business scenarios you may encounter (e.g. What if the demand for your product decreases? What if business is better than expected? How quickly will you expand?)

• Pay all accounts on time and avoid bad debt situations.

• Be realistic about the amount of work you take on and your yearly and long-range (five-year) business plan. Many small businesses lose heart when large profits do not automatically materialise. Another trap is business overload and not being able to deliver a quality product on time.

• Review your business plan, including your marketing strategy, regularly. Fine-tune it as necessary.

• Be prepared to make quick, tough decisions.

• Do not hesitate to obtain any advice or additional assistance.

13 START-UP CHECKLIST1. Are you ready to start a business? Be sure you know what you want and understand what is involved, including the personal sacrifices. Be willing to devote long hours to your endeavour.

2. Have you done your homework? Conduct research to ensure there is a need for your product or service. Be sure market conditions can support your business. Talk with friends, family, and advisers to obtain business information.

3. How will you utilize your skills and compensate for your weaknesses? Evaluate your personal qualities and skills. Use your talents and recognise the areas you need help with.

4. What form will your business take? Decide on a structure - incorporation, partnership or sole proprietorship.

5. How will you promote and market your business? Just how are you going to distinguish yourself from the competition?

6. What is your pricing strategy? What does the price say about your product and its quality compared to the competition? Think about what you will charge people for your product/service. Estimate your break-even point and revenues.

7. Prepare a detailed business plan – it is essential.

8. What funding sources will fuel your enterprise? Secure sufficient financial resources for start-up and operations

9. Where will you locate? Pick a business location that makes sense for you and your customers.

10. How will your business operate on a daily basis? How will you deliver your product or service and manage your business? Work out what you will need for the smooth day-to-day functioning of your business.

Page 18: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

BASIC INFORMATIONStart Your Own18

15. GlossaryWORD THE WORD MEANS

Accounts Show you how much your business owes, how much it is owed by others, and your earnings. They help you measure your progress.

Advertising Giving information to people to make them more interested in buying your goods and services; public notice, offering or asking for goods and services.(make something generally or publicly known).

Analyse To study something carefully to find out if there was a change. For example, by analysing your records you can find out if your sales are falling.

Bookkeeping Process of maintaining your accounts.Budget Save or allocate money for a particular purpose.Business An activity, which can be found wherever people need to buy

things or have things done for them.Business Plan A plan to help you determine which direction to go, in order to

get you up and running.

Cash Payment immediately, not on credit. Cash flow The movement of money into and out of a business in a given

period. An estimate of how much will be received and paid out of the

business. It helps you to time your expenditures in order to avoid cash shortages.

Cash Flow Plan A business plan which shows how much money is likely to come in and go out of a business during a period of time in the future, for example, the next three months.

Cheque A form in which you ask your bank to pay a certain amount of money to the person or business named on the cheque. You need a current account or a savings account with a bank to be able to use cheques.

Communication Making something known, conveying something.Community A group of people living in a given area.Competitors People who offer the same or similar product/service as you;

you compete with them for customers.Cooperative A business started by ten (10) or more individuals who business contribute their skills and money for the betterment of their

economic condition.Costing The way you calculate the costs of making and selling a

product, or providing a service. Costs All the money your business spends to make and sell your

products or services. Costs can be divided into direct costs and indirect costs.

14 FINAL REMARKIt is often said that the first year of a new business is the most difficult. Research shows that nearly half of all businesses disappear within three years of launching. To help you better prepare, these points are the key to business success:

• good management• adequate planning • sufficient financial resources• healthy cash flow• controlled spending and the ability to collect • money owing• effective marketing• a good product and service

Page 19: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

19Start Your OwnBASIC INFORMATION

Credit The seller’s agreement to be paid later. The seller gives you goods, materials or services but you do not have to pay imme-diately. For example, if you have 30 days’ credit, you must pay within 30 days.

Crime This involves the robbing, assaulting and even killing of businesspeople and their businesses. It can lead to the closing down of businesses.

Customer A person who buys your products or services (buyer).Customer care Giving serious attention or thought to your customers.Customer service Ensuring that your customers get all they need and at the

appropriate time.Customers’ A book where you write down, for each cus Accountstomer all items or services your business sells to them on Record credit.

Debt The money you owe.Delivery note A document that the supplier sends with a delivery. It lists the

type and quantity of goods delivered. The supplier wants you to sign the delivery note as proof that you have received the goods.

Demand Desire of customers for goods and services which they wish to buy or use.

Depreciation The loss in value of machinery, tools or other equipment, which have a high value, and last for a long time. Depreciation is a cost to your business.

Direct costs All costs that are directly related to the products or services you make or sell, or the production of those products or services. There are two different types of direct costs: direct material costs and direct labour costs.

Direct distribution Selling your products directly to the customers who use them. Direct labour All the money your business spends on wages, costs salaries and benefits for the employees who work in the pro-

duction of your products or services. Retailers and wholesalers do not have direct labour costs.

Direct material All the money your business spends on the materials costs which become part of, or are directly related to, the products

or services you make or sell. For a retailer or wholesaler, direct material costs are the costs of buying goods to resell.

Distribution Part of Place. Distribution means different ways of getting your products or services to your customers: direct distribution, retail distribution, or wholesale distribution. Ensuring that your custo-mers receive your product or service promptly with the minimal amount of costs to you.

Employees Persons who work for somebody or for a company in return for wages.

Enquiry Questions to a supplier to find out the type of goods, prices, payment, delivery and other conditions they offer. The answer to an enquiry is a quotation.

Entrepreneurship Starting and managing of a business by a person.Equipment All the machinery, tools, workshop fittings, office furniture, etc.,

that a business needs. Equipment is normally expensive and is expected to last for a long time.

Financial Taking care of your finances; day-to-day operation management in order to keep a proper financial status or a proper financial

report.Financial plan The process of determining the financial needs of a firm inclu-

ding a strategy for obtaining those funds.Flexibility Being prepared to get through the highs and lows of business,

when circumstances could change almost daily. Being flexible and adapting to new conditions is important in business.

Forecast When you make a forecast for your business, you work out what you think is likely to happen in the future: how much you can expect to sell, how much materials are likely to cost you, how much cash you can expect to have.

General When two or more people bring together their money partnershipand skills to start a business.Governmental These are government rules and guidelines, which regulations business people must follow before doing certain things.

Indirect costs All other costs, except direct costs, that you have for running your business. Indirect costs are normally not directly related to one particular product or service your business makes or sells.

Indirect costs A percentage (%) that retailers and wholesalers need to charge add to the direct material costs of each item to cover the total

indirect costs. You use your indirect costs charge to calculate the indirect costs per item.

Indirect labour The money that your business spends on wages, costs salaries, benefits for owners and employees who do not work

directly in the production of goods or services. For retailers and wholesalers, all salaries and wages are indirect labour costs.

Invoice A document that tells you to pay for the goods or materials you have received. An invoice lists details of what you have bought and tells you how much you must pay, when you must pay, who you must pay and how you must pay.

Knowledge Everything that is known (or understood).

Page 20: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

BASIC INFORMATIONStart Your Own20

Labour Costs A form manufacturers and service operators can use Form to calculate the working hours and pay per month for everyone

working in the business. The Labour costs form gives you information to calculate the direct labour costs per item and indirect labour costs per item for any product or service in your business.

Lease agreement An agreement to rent for a certain period at an agreed price (rental contract).

Location Place or position, finding the place of somebody or something.Loss The amount of money a business loses. You make a loss when

the amount of money that went out of the business for costs is higher than the amount of money that came into the business from income.

Management The way of taking good care of your business and the day to day operation in order to make it a profitable venture.

Manufacturing When you make things to sell to your customers. For business example, you may make candles, clothes, crafts or furniture.Market Area of potential exchange of products/services for money.Market research Getting information about your customers and competitors.

This information helps you understand what customers want, and it can help you to promote your business.

Marketing Everything you do to satisfy the needs of your customers and make a profit by:

• providing the product or service your customers need • setting the price your customers are willing to pay • locating your business at a place your customers can reach,

or getting your products or services to your customers • using promotion to inform your customers about your

products or services and to attract your customers to buy from you.

These are the “four Ps” of marketing: Product, Price, Place and Promotion.

Motivation Having the initiative and drive to make your business go through the start up phase.

Net profit The amount of money left after you have subtracted all other costs from the value added.

Objectives Aims set out in your business plan.Operating costs These may include salaries for yourself (as the owner) and

any employees you may have, and all day-to-day expenses needed to run the business until your business shows a profit.

Order A request to a seller to supply certain goods. You can make your order by visiting, phoning, faxing or writing to the sup-pliers.

Partnership An association of two or more persons who combine their property or their skill, or both, in one business and agree to share in the profits and losses.

Place Particular area or position in space occupied by somebody or something.

The third P of marketing. In marketing, place means: • location - where your business is located, and • distribution - how to get your products to your customers. Planning Thinking about your business and working out what to do about

something before it happens. Price Amount of money for which something is bought or sold. The second P of marketing. In marketing, price means: • setting a price that customers are willing to pay • making sure the price gives a high enough profit. Pricing How you can determine the price of your product. You need

to build in the cost of raw materials, labour and overheads, as well as an anticipated profit margin.

Product This is the outcome of manufacturing processes; can be consumed or used by the buyer, all rights to the product are transferred at moment of purchase.

The first P of marketing. In marketing, product means providing the products or services customers want.

Product Costing A form which you can use to calculate the total costs of Form any product or service in your business. There is one Product

Costing Form for manufacturers and service operators and a different Product Costing Form for retailers and wholesalers.

Profit Amount of money gained in business, especially the difference between the amount earned and the amount spent.

The amount of money a business earns. You make a profit when the amount of money that comes into the business from sales is higher than the amount of money that goes out of the business for costs. Profit is often divided into value added and net profit.

Profit margin Difference between the cost of buying or producing something and the price for which one sells it.

Profit and Loss A calculation of how much profit or loss your business Statement made during a given period, for example, a month, six months

or a year. Promotion Methods to ensure that potential customers get to know about

your product, for example through radio or print advertise-ments.

The fourth P of marketing. In marketing, promotion means informing and attracting customers to buy your products or services.

Publicity What newspapers and others say about your business. You do not pay for publicity. It is free promotion.

Page 21: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

21Start Your OwnBASIC INFORMATION

Quotation An answer to an enquiry, in which a supplier makes an offer to sell certain goods. In a quotation, a supplier gives detailed information about the type of goods, prices, payment, delivery, and any other conditions.

Receipt Written proof that you have paid for the goods or services you bought. The seller signs the receipt that he or she gives you.

Record Written information about business transactions. Examples are the Record Book and the Customers’ Accounts Record.

Record Book A book where you write down all the money that comes in and goes out of the business.

Re-order level The number of items that you estimate you need until you get new stock. When the quantity of stock falls to the re-order level, it is time to order more.

Resources In this context, funds - for example monetary resources. Can also mean other resources such as people, raw material input.

Retail business This is when you sell things other people have made.Retail distribution Selling your products to shops and stores who then sell to

customers who use the products. Revenue Income, especially the total annual income of the state from

taxes.

Sales Quantity of goods sold.Sales and Costs A business plan which shows what sales, costs and Plan profit a business is likely to have in a future period, for examp-

le, a year. Sales promotion Everything you do to make customers buy more when they

have come to your business. Service A one-off activity you sell without selling the rights to it.Skills Specialized expertise; practical and theoretical knowledge of

how to do something.

Skilled labour Experienced and trained work, or ability to do something well.Sole proprietor A person who chooses to own his own business by himself

and using his own money to start it and who will have complete control over the business.

Stock All products your business has for sale and all raw materials or parts your business keeps and uses to make into products.

Stock card A record of your stock using a separate card or page for each product or material that your business keeps in stock.

Stock record Records where you write down all stock that comes into or goes out of your business. Make your own stock records, for example by using stock cards, a hard cover book or an exercise book.

Stocktaking A system to count, measure or weigh all your stock, and write down the quantities on a stocktaking list.

Stocktaking list Paper sheets, an exercise book or something else you use during stocktaking to write down the quantities of each product or material your business has.

Suppliers People you receive from or buy your inputs (for example raw-materials) from.

Tax Money paid to the government by individuals and companies for the services the government offers to the people.

Terms of delivery Agreement between buyer and seller about paying for delivery. Either the buyer or the seller pays for transport costs.

Terms of payment Agreement between buyer and seller about when and how goods must be paid for. For example, the seller may give credit or ask for cash on delivery.

Time All the years of the past, present and the future.Total costs All the money that your business spends on direct costs and

indirect costs in order to make and/or sell a product, or provide a service.

Trade shows A collection of businesses and products promoted publicly together.

Transaction An exchange of money for goods, services or other money

Value added The amount of money left after you have subtracted your direct material costs from the money earned from sales.

Voucher Receipt or other written proof of a transaction, written down in the Record Book.

Wages Payment made or received for work or services.Wholesale Selling your products in very large quantities to a business distribution which then sells them in smaller quantities to retailers. Work-hours The total amount of time needed to make a product or provide

a service. The time taken by each person working on the product or service is added up to give the total time.

Written agreement Agreement expressed in writing.

Page 22: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

Business IdeasAGRICULTURE

CASSAVA GROWING 23

CATTLE RAISING 24

FISHING 25

FRUIT GROWING 26

MATOKE (BANANA) GROWING 27

PIG FARMING 28

POULTRY 29

RABBIT FARMING 30

SHEEP FARMING 31

TOMATO GROWING 32

VEGETABLE GROWING 33

Page 23: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

23Start Your OwnAGRICULTURE

Business Ideas INTRODUCTIONThis business earns profi t from growing cassava for sale. It requires the cultivation of a patch of land, cutting cassava stems, digging holes to match the lengths of the cassava stems, and planting them in the prepared holes. When the plants begin to germinate, the garden is weeded. After a while, the cassava is ready for harvesting and can be sold.

Start up costs

Description Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for cassava growing 50,000 Materials 20,000 Total Amount 70,000

Running costs

Description Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000 Pesticides 150,000 Transport 25,000 Total Amount 180,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Jane„I am a housewife and have three children, who are going to school. I grew up learning how to cultivate land and plant crops. When I got married, I could not fi nd employment since I didn’t have the required qualifi cations. I solved this problem by cultivating my three-acre garden. I planted many crops and cassava is one of them. Every harvesting season I sell my crops in the market where I have a stall. I do this during the day till 6.00pm. At night from 7.00pm- 9.00pm I boil cassava from my garden and take it to a nearby market where most women sell cooked foodstuff. I have done this for a long time and now I help my husband with fees and the daily needs of the family. I feed my children from the same harvest. When the harvest is a lot, I sell the surplus to traders, who transport it to various towns for sale.“

Information / Training Provider

• Established cassava growers• Local agricultural offi cials• Market traders

CASSAVA GROWINGCASSAVA GROWING

MaterialsCassava cuttings can normally be obtained free of charge from neighbouring farmers and agricultural shops.

Work placeFor a small enterprise, a piece of land of about half an acre is needed for the growing. The harvest can be taken to various places for sale.

EquipmentAll the required equipment can be bought from hardware shops. The equipment may include:• Hoe• Slasher• Panga

PersonnelIdeally two people can run the business, both engaged in cultivation and sales.

MarketThe market for cassava is all year round. Demand how-ever increases during the rainy season when cassava is scarce and expensive. Cassava can be sold in the follow-ing places:• Market places• Households• Restaurants• Snack bars

Opportunities• Contract to supply schools• Contract to supply various markets• Cultivate a larger patch of land for constant supply

Challenges• Diffi culties in transportation to various markets• Labour intensive • Limited market• Decays quickly once uprooted, requires immediate consumption

Page 24: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

AGRICULTUREStart Your Own24

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about buying calves and keeping them until they are fully-grown, then selling them in the markets. Cattle have to be handled with care so that diseases can be avoided. Cattle provide beef, milk, hides, skin and ghee etc.

Start up costs

Description Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000 Materials 300,000 Rent 50,000 Treatment 50,000 Total Amount 500,000

Running costs

Description Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000 Rent 50,000 Treatment 50,000 Transport 40,000 Total Amount 150,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Muhwezi“I inherited this cattle farm from my father who had about 20 cattle in his farm at that time. The cattle give birth almost every year and this has expanded my farm a lot. I mainly keep the cows, but sell the bulls. Every morning I supply the nearby butcheries, where I sell a big bull for about 800,000 Shillings. In addition, I sell milk to my customers every morning, which has greatly increased my income. During public holidays like Christmas, I have a high income, which enables my family to live a comfortable life. My wife and my three children are very proud of our farm.”

Information / Training Provider

• Agriculture offi cers• Established farms• Veterinary drug shops• Veterinary offi cials

MaterialsCalves can be bought from market places; other required materials are normally available in vet shops.

Work placeFor this business a plot of land of about 10x10 paces is needed, which should include shelter for the cattle. Furthermore grazing land and a water supply for the cattle should be available.

EquipmentMost equipment is available in hardware shops, although fence poles can be cut from trees. The equipment may include:• Fence poles• Hammer• Iron sheets• Large basin • Spade• Wheel-barrow

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run this business and should have knowledge of treating cattle and raising them.

MarketThough higher demand arises during festive seasons, the market for beef is all year round and may be found in:• Butcheries• Ceremonies• Leather factories• Public occasions• Restaurants

Opportunities• Contract for supplying butcheries• Festive seasons• Selling hides and skins for higher income

Challenges• Cattle may succumb to diseases and drought• A lot of labour is needed• Transportation to markets may be diffi cult

CATTLE RAISINGCATTLE RAISING

Page 25: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

25Start Your OwnAGRICULTURE

Work placeFishing is done in coastal and inland waters or in rivers.

EquipmentThe equipment can be found in special shops near the land-ing sites. Nets and hooks are locally made by craftsmen. • Boat or Canoe• Cutting knife• Fishing nets• Hooks• Panga• Strings• Weighting scales

PersonnelIdeally, three people can run this business. One should know how to catch and trade fi sh.

MarketThe market for fi sh is throughout the year, although in some seasons fi sh is rare. Fish can be sold at the follow-ing places• Market places• Hotels• Households• Restaurants

Opportunities• Provide all kinds of fi sh• Supply markets, restaurants and fi sh processing factories

Challenges• Competition from existing fi shermen• Decay due to poor storage• Diffi culties in transportation • Labour demanding• Needs immediate consumption• Requirement of an offi cial license for fi shing

INTRODUCTIONFishing is the process of catching fi sh by using fi shing nets or hooks and strings to trap the fi sh in coastal or inland waters. The fi sh is collected by a trading company or transported by the fi shermen directly to the shore for sale.

Start up costs

Description Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the fi shing business 350,000 License 50,000 Transport 50,000 Total Amount 450,000

Running costs

Description Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000 Transport 50,000 Total Amount 55,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Jacob of Kasenyi, Entebbe.“I started fi shing when I was fi fteen years old; my father was a fi sherman and he taught us how to catch fi sh. I used to go fi shing and sell the fi sh with him. Since he is now too old, I catch fi sh by myself. I started fi shing with a fi shing hook, string and worms to attract them, so I could only collect a few fi sh. Later I joined up with a partner. We bought a fi shing net and a small boat, which increased the amount of fi sh caught, and also made it a bit easier. We go fi shing late in the evening and come back to the shore the next morning and we sell the fi sh in the market. On a good day, the income per person is about 30,000 Shillings. My wife sells the fi sh in the market. Our earnings are suffi cient to cater for our daily needs and also for the school fees of our daughter.”

Information / Training Provider• Equipment supply shops• Established fi shermen• Fishermen’s association• Fishery research institutes

FISHINGFISHING

Page 26: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

AGRICULTUREStart Your Own26

INTRODUCTIONFruit growing involves cultivating a patch of land: digging holes, planting the seeds and fi nally harvesting the fruits for sale. The plants are weeded, pruned, watered and sprayed against pests and diseases. Fruits may include papaws, oranges, avocados, mangoes, pineapples, watermelons, passion fruits and many others. Fruits contain vitamins, which are essential for the human diet.

Start up costs

Description Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 150,000 Materials 80,000 Utilities (Water) 20,000 Rent (only storage room) 30,000Transport 50,000 Total Amount 330,000

Running costs

Description Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000 Materials 30,000 Utilities (Water) 20,000 Rent (only storage room) 30,000Transport 20,000 Total Amount 110,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider

• Agricultural extension offi cers• Agricultural shops• Non Government Organisations, Community Based Organisations• Other farmers

MaterialsQuality planting materials are found at seed shops, which are recommended as they provide improved varieties.Work placeFor this enterprise, a plot of about one acre is needed, and a shelter of 3x3 paces for storage. EquipmentThe necessary equipment is available in hardware and agricultural shops and markets. It may include:• Hand hoes • Packing boxes• Pangas • Racks• Sickle • Slasher• Spray pumps • Watering can / pipes• Water hosePersonnelTwo people can effectively run this business. Both should have knowledge of fruit growing.MarketThe demand for fruit is mostly in urban areas and other places with large populations. • Hotels • Households• Market places • Restaurants• SupermarketsOpportunities• High yields• Supplying markets, hotels, restaurants• Exporting products to other countries• Increasing varieties of fruits• Providing nutritious value foodstuffs• Providing quality fruitsChallenges• Prone to pests, diseases, theft• Dependent on weather conditions• Diffi cult transportation• Far distance from markets• Fruits eaten by animals• Maintaining freshness• Perishable products• Need for immediate consumption

FRUIT GROWINGFRUIT GROWING

Page 27: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

27Start Your OwnAGRICULTURE

INTRODUCTIONMatoke (Banana) growing includes cultivating a piece of land, digging holes of about one feet, placing the young banana plant in the ground and burying it in the soil. The plantation is weeded as long as the plants are growing and then left to mature to produce bananas until they are ready for harvest.

Start up costs

Description Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 30,000 Materials 30,000 Utilities (Water) 10,000 Transport 20,000 Total Amount 90,000

Running costs

Description Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 3,000 Materials 30,000 Utilities (Water) 10,000 Transport 20,000 Total Amount 63,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Nalongo of Bweyogerere, Wakiso.“I am a single mother and have four children, who are going to school. After my husband passed away I started serious farming, because that was the only way to earn money and afford the school fees. I joined a women’s group of about 20 members. We helped each other to look for business ideas with small capital. Finally I thought of planting matoke on our plot of land. The members helped me to cultivate the plot, and I helped the others with their business. This was in 1994, now I have a big matoke plantation. I frequently sell the yields, which is enough to cater for my family; further I can save about 50,000 Shillings per month. I have also expanded my business to piggery and I can say that we are living a comfortable life.”

Information / Training Provider

• Market traders• Agricultural offi cers• Established matoke farmers

MaterialsYoung banana plants can be bought from banana farmers.

Work placeFor this business a plot of land of about one acre is needed. The land should be fertile enough to yield good harvest.

EquipmentThe equipment is available at hardware shops and may include:• Hand hoe• Knife• Panga• Slasher• Watering can / pipe• Wheel-barrow

PersonnelIdeally three people can run this business and should have knowledge of planting matoke. All are engaged in produc-tion and sales.

MarketThe market is throughout the year. Matoke can be sold in the following places• Cafes• Hotels / Restaurants • Households• Market places• Schools

Opportunities• High yields with new improved varieties• Contract for supplying market places, hotel, restaurants

Challenges• Encounter diffi culty in transportation due to long distance• Damaged during transport• Get ripe easily if it is stored for a long period• Subject to pests, diseases• Subject to weather conditions

MATOKE (BANANA) GROWINGMATOKE (BANANA) GROWING

Page 28: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

AGRICULTUREStart Your Own28

MaterialsPigs can be bought from the pig farms.

Work placeFor this enterprise a shelter with water supply of about 10x10 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe needed equipment can be purchased from hardware shops, shops and markets and may include:• Feeding trough• Jerry cans• Pails• Pair of rubber boots• Rakes• Spades• Water drums• Wheel-barrow

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and should have the knowledge of animal farming.

MarketThe market for pork is throughout the year. Pigs can be sold at the following places• Butcheries• Meat shops

Opportunities• Festive season and public holiday• Raise bigger pigs for more earning • Supplying contracts for pork with restaurants, hotels, butcheries, groceries etc.

Challenges• Pigs may die due to infections• Transporting the alive animals may be diffi cult• Animals needs care and personnel commitment

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about planning, coordinating and performing farming operations to breed and raise pigs for the production of meat and breeding stocks. The pigs are fed and treated to maintain healthy conditions and to avoid diseases until they are big enough for sale. Pigs provide pork, which contains protein (an essential nutrient for keeping healthy).

Start up costs

Description Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000 Materials (Pigs, Drugs, Appliances) 170,000 Utility (Water, Feeds) 70,000 Rent (shelter) 50,000 Total Amount 390,000

Running costs

Description Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000 Materials (Pigs, Drugs, Appliances) 20,000 Utility (Water, Feeds) 70,000 Rent 50,000 Total Amount 145,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Nankabirwa of Bweyogerere“In the year 2000 I bought fi ve weaned pigs and today I have 25 pigs. I am selling each for about 60,000 Shillings.”

Information / Training Provider• Agricultural offi cers• Agricultural schools• Pig farmers• Vet offi cers

PIG FARMINGPIG FARMING

Page 29: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

29Start Your OwnAGRICULTURE

Poultry

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about planning, co-ordinating and performing farming operations to breed and raise chickens for egg and/or meat production. Certain breeds of chickens are good for eating. To ensure high grades and good prices, these chickens are fed, treated properly and kept till they are ready for sale. Other breeds of chickens are layers and provide eggs, which can be sold for another source of income.

MaterialsIt is recommended to buy chicks from bigger poultry farms like “Ugachick” in Kampala.Work placeFor this enterprise a shelter with water supply of about 6x6 pace is needed.EquipmentThe equipment used in poultry farms is obtained from hardware shops and agricultural shops. The equipment may include:• Basins• Building polls• Hammer• Iron sheets• Spade• Wheel-barrow • Wire meshPersonnelIdeally two people can run this business; both engaged in poultry farming and in sales. At least one person should have the knowledge of poultry farming and identifying diseases.MarketEggs have a good market throughout the year and chicken during festive seasons such as Christmas etc.• Butcheries• Eating cafes• Hotels • Households• Market places • Restaurants • SupermarketsOpportunities• Market for chicken meat is steady• Supplying contracts with supermarkets• Public occasions and ceremoniesChallenges• Chickens may die due to infections• Transportation may be diffi cult• Labour demanding• Chickens need care and personnel commitment

Success Story“Poultry has been my business since 1990. I started small and I have achieved greatly. In the beginning I just bought 20 chickens, which I raised until they were ready for sale. After a year of my business all my chickens died due a disease and this frustrated my business and me. But I did not give up. Again I bought 20 chickens with the little money I had saved. This time I raised them with much more care. Later I divided them for producing eggs. With this I have been able to collect 10 trays of eggs every two weeks. I supply most shops in Mukono and Bweyogerere. My poultry farm has expanded greatly because I left some eggs to hatch. Now I have about 200 chickens in my farm and I sell most of it to households and restaurants for about 3,000 Shillings and a tray of eggs for 2,400 Shillings. But my biggest earnings come during festival seasons.”

Information / Training Provider • Agricultural offi cers• Agricultural schools• Poultry farms• Vet offi cers

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 150,000 Materials (Chickens, Drugs) 200,000 Utility (Water, Feeds) 60,000 Rent 30,000 Total Amount 440,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000 Materials (Treatment) 50,000 Utility (Water, Feeds) 60,000 Rent 30,000 Total Amount 150,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

POULTRY

Page 30: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

AGRICULTUREStart Your Own30

RABBIT FARMINGRABBIT FARMING

MaterialsIt is recommended to buy rabbits from established rabbit farms.

Work placeFor this enterprise a shelter with water supply of about 4x4 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe equipment can be bought from hardware shops and may include:• Basins• Building polls• Hand hoe• Iron sheets• Spade• Wire mesh

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business and should have the knowledge of rabbit farming and identifying diseases.

MarketThe market for rabbits is mainly in bigger hotels and restau-rants. Rabbits can be sold in the following places:• Butcheries• Meat shops

Opportunities• Good raising for a larger market• Supplying contracts with hotels, supermarkets

Challenges• Rabbits may die due to infections• Transportation may be diffi cult• Limited market in rural settings• Rabbits needs care and personnel commitment

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about planning, co-ordinating and performing farming operations to breed and raise rabbits for sale. The rabbits are fed and treated properly to achieve better grades. The feeds are leaves such as potato leaves, cabbage, carrots, spinach etc. One can begin by buying a couple of rabbits; a female rabbit gives birth to about 8 rabbits every eight months.

Start up costs

Description Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000 Materials (Rabbits) 50,000 Utility (Water, Feeds) 15,000 Rent 20,000 Total Amount 185,000

Running costs

Description Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000 Utility (Water, Feeds) 15,000 Rent 20,000 Total Amount 40,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success Story“In 1995 I joined a women‘s group. At that time I was a housewife and had no other job. In this women’s group we developed innovative business ideas, such as rabbit farming, poultry, shops salons etc. I chose rabbit farming and got some capital from the group. I managed to buy a female and male rabbit. Now I have 20 rabbits and I sell most of them to hotels and restaurants. Each rabbit costs about 5,000 Shillings. I take my children to school and cater for our daily needs. My business has been a great success.”

Information / Training Provider• Agricultural offi cers• Agricultural schools• Established rabbit farmer• Vet offi cers

Page 31: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

31Start Your OwnAGRICULTURE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about buying lambs and raising them up until they are fully-grown and selling them. The lambs have to be handled and treated with care so that diseases can be avoided. They feed on grass and water. Sheep provide mutton and wool.

W H A T Y O U N E E D

SHEEP FARMINGSHEEP FARMING

MaterialsLambs can be bought from market places or sheep farms. Females are normally kept for breeding and reproducing.

Work placeFor this business a pen / shade of about 15x15 paces is needed. Grazing land is also necessary to provide the feed. Clean water should be available.

EquipmentMost equipment is found in hardware shops, whereas the poles can be cut from trees. The equipment may include:• Basin• Building polls• Hammer• Hand hoe• Iron sheets• Panga, Spade, Wheel-barrow

PersonnelIdeally three people can run this business; all engaged in raising and selling. They should have the knowledge of sheep farming.

MarketThough higher demand comes up during festive seasons, the market for mutton is throughout the year and is found in:• Butcheries• Meat shops

Opportunities• Contract for supplying butcheries• Public occasions and ceremonies• Cultural functions• Selling wool for processing

Challenges• Sheep may be prone to diseases,• Climate in Uganda is not ideal for sheep raising in certain areas• Need supply of water• A lot of labour is demanded• Transportation to markets may be diffi cult

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000 Materials (Lambs) 200,000 Treatment 40,000 Rent (shade) 75,000 Utilities (Water) 10,000 Total Amount 425,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000 Treatment 40,000 Rent 75,000 Utilities (Water) 10,000 Total Amount 135,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider

• Agricultural offi cer• Agricultural schools• Established sheep farms• Veterinary offi cers

Page 32: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

AGRICULTUREStart Your Own32

TOMATO GROWINGTOMATO GROWING

MaterialsTomato seeds and pesticides are bought from agriculture shops.

Work placeFor this enterprise a patch of land of about half an acre is needed, which should have a good water supply.

EquipmentThe equipment can be bought from hardware shops and they may include:• Hand hoe • Slasher• Spray pumps • Watering cans / pipes

PersonnelIdeally two people can run the business and both are engaged in production and sales. The personnel should have the know-how about growing tomatoes and using pesticides.

MarketMarket for tomatoes is throughout the year although it increases during festive seasons like Christmas, Easter etc. Tomatoes are sold in places like:• Hotels / Restaurants• Households• Market places• Working places

Opportunities• Contract to supply hotels, restaurants, markets• Larger planting area provides higher income• Off seasons (dry seasons)• Public / festive seasons

Challenges• Diffi cult transportation• Perish fast• Labour demanding• Pests and diseases• Requires attention

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about planting tomatoes for sale. This includes preparing a patch of land, planting the seeds in a seedbed under a shade and later transferring tomatoes to a fi eld where they grow and reach a height of 5 to 10 cm. The tomatoes grow to maturity in a fi eld where they are harvested. Spraying is usually necessary to avoid pests and diseases. The most commonly used method for tomato planting is by using a hand hoe.

Start up costs

Description Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the tomato growing business 100,000Materials 50,000Utility (Water) 6,000Total Amount 156,000

Running costs

Description Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 3,000Materials 20,000Utility (Water) 6,000Total Amount 29,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Sam of Namanve“I grow mostly vegetables which I sell at Namanve market and transport some to Bweyogerere and Kireka market for sale. I had been growing a lot of other vegetables for a long time but then I expanded to tomatoes. I divided a piece of land where I plant tomatoes. Tomatoes need a lot of attention because they are prone to pest and diseases and also heavy rains can destroy the plants. The fi rst time I planted tomatoes, I wasn’t sure whether it would yield well. It was just a trial on my part but I was happy when the garden yielded so well. I sold most of it in the market and got good profi ts. Tomatoes are now one of my favourite vegetables that I grow. I have never regretted having tried the business because it helped to increase my business a lot.”

Information / Training Provider• Agricultural Institutions• Established vegetable farmers• Seed shops

Page 33: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

33Start Your OwnAGRICULTURE

INTRODUCTIONVegetable growing includes planting, weeding and harvesting vegetables for sale. It involves preparing a piece of land, planting, watering and weeding the plants. Vegetables include cabbages, tomatoes, onions, sukumawiki, nakati, buga, eggplant etc. The plants should be protected from pests. Vegetables contain vitamins, and mineral salt, which are essential for the human diet.

W H A T Y O U N E E D

VEGETABLE GROWINGVEGETABLE GROWING

MaterialsThe seeds are bought from agricultural shops.

Work placeAbout an acre of land is needed for production and storage.

EquipmentAll the necessary tools can be bought from agricultural shops and these may include:• Hoes• Panga• Rakes• Spray pumps• Water cans / pipes• Wheel-barrow

PersonnelIdeally two people can run the business and at least one person should have the knowledge of vegetable growing.

MarketThe market for vegetables is throughout the year and can be sold at places like:• Hotels • Households• Market places • Restaurants

Opportunities• High yields• Nutritious and clean foodstuff• Off-season products• Quality vegetables

Challenges• Animals can destroy plants• Transportation is diffi cult due to distance from market places• Good storage facilities may be diffi cult to provide• Labour intensive• Require immediate market, else the vegetables start to rot• Products are prone to pests, diseases, theft• Good harvest depends on favourable weather conditions

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the business 120,000Materials 80,000Transport 50,000Total Amount 250,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 80,000Transport 50,000Total Amount 140,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Ogwan Peter of Adwila Lira.“I got into vegetable growing in 1990 when the government program of subsidising farm implements and pesticides was at its peak. I began by growing carrots, cabbages and tomatoes in the fi rst season. I used the profi ts to expand into growing other vegetables. I have never regretted the decision I made because now I am living in my own brick house and I still grow vegetables every season.”

Information / Training Provider• Agriculture extension offi cers• Other farmers• Seed sellers

Page 34: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

Business IdeasArmrest And Cushion Making 35 Bajia Making 36Bakery 37Basket Weaving 38Biscuits Baking 39Blacksmith 40Brick Making 41Briquette Making 42Burglar Proofi ng Manufacturing 43Candle Making 44Carpentry Workshop 45Carved Wood Production 46Cassava Chips Making 47Chapatti Making 48Charcoal Making 49Chicken Roasting 50Doughnut Frying 51Electronic Workshop 52Embroidery 53Fish Ball Making 54

Fish Filleting and Frying 55Fritter Shop 56Gonja (BANANA) Roasting 57Groundnut Roasting 58Groundnut Sauce Making 59Herbal Soap making 60Herbs Shop 61Jewellery Maker 62Juice Shop 63Kerosene Lamp Manufacturing 64Knitting 65Leather Goods 66Leather Tanning 67Maize Boiling 68Maize Roasting 69Mandazi Frying 70Mat Making 71Mattresses Recycling 72Meat Processing 73Meat Roasting 74

Muffi n Making 75Packaging Materials Making 76Pancakes (Kabalagala) Making 77Peanut Butter Making 78Pet Farming 79Picture Frame Making 80Popcorn Making 81Pork Butchery 82Pork Roasting 83Pottery 84Push Cart Production 85Queen Cake Making 86Samosa Making 87Steel Recycling 88Stone and Sand Excavation 89Tiles Making 90Toy Making 91Traditional Music Instruments Manufacturer 92Traditional Sandal Making 93Wooden Wheelbarrow Fabrication 94

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

Page 35: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

35Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

ARMREST AND CUSION MAKINGINTRODUCTIONThis business is about collecting rugs from tailors or textile factories, fi lling these into ready made, small bags and then fi xing them into armrests or cushions for sale. The raw materials are available at a very low rate.

ARMREST AND CUSHION MAKING

MaterialsMaterials for this business are available from tailors, local shops and markets.

Work placeFor this enterprise, a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed. However, the business can also be done under a simple shelter or even on a veranda.

EquipmentThe equipment needed can be bought from local shops and markets and may include:• Needles• Pair of scissors• Sewing machine• Stitches• Tape measure

PersonnelIdeally, one person can run the business and should have knowledge of armrests and cushion making.

MarketThe market for this business is throughout the year. Armrests and cushions can be sold at the following places• Bars• Car owners• Carpentry workshops• Furniture markets• Hotels / Restaurants• Households

Opportunities• Low running cost• Quality work• Unique armrests

Challenges• Competition from other producers• Failure of payment• Limited market in rural places• Limited source of raw materials

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 150,000 Materials 30,000 Transport 20,000 Total Amount 200,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000 Materials 30,000 Transport 10,000 Total Amount 50,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Established businesses• Tailoring institutes

Business Ideas

Page 36: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own36

INTRODUCTIONBajia making involves mixing ingredients such as soya fl our, salt, dania, curry powder and water. When it is solid enough, the mixture is squeezed through a netted pan. The dough is deep fried with cooking oil until it turns brown. The bajia and the cook-ing oil are then separated and left for cooling. Finally the products are packed and sold. The commonly used method for bajia making is with a charcoal stove.

MaterialsThe raw materials are available in local shops and mar-kets.

Work placeFor this business, a fl oor space of about 2x2 paces is needed.

EquipmentA working table is needed, which can be made by a carpentry workshop. The rest of the equipment is available at local shops and markets and includes: • Charcoal stove• Deep frying pan• Ladle• Netted pan• Packing bags• Saucepan• Tray

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run the business and they should have the knowledge of bajia making.

MarketThe market is located in busy public places and school areas. Furthermore, products can also be supplied to supermarkets, local markets and shops. • Households• Restaurants• Schools• Street vending• Working places

Opportunities• Quality bajia for a wider market• Supplying contracts with shops & restaurants• Sales expansion to markets, hotels• School openings

Challenges• Competition• Labour demanding• Limited market

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 50,000 Materials 50,000 Utilities (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 48,000 Rent 20,000 Total Amount 168,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000 Materials 50,000 Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 48,000 Rent 20,000 Total Amount 123,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Rose, Robeta Enterprise, Kampala“Making bajia has always been my favourite at home. After school I sat at home for almost three years. I learnt from a friend how to make different kinds of snacks such as cookies, doughnuts and bajia. I prepared bajia for my younger sister at home. My mother advised me to make bajia for sale at our grocery shop. I prepared at least 25 packets of bajia per week for a selling price of 200 Shillings each. Later I expanded the business by supplying other shops at the trading centre. Even after getting a job, I still make bajia every weekend and distribute them to my clients. I now make 200 packets of bajia per week. The income is enough to cater for the rent of my house, my monthly needs, and I can even save some money too.”

Information / Training Provider• Catering institute• Established bajia makers

BAJIA MAKINGBAJIA MAKING

Page 37: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

37Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

BAKERYINTRODUCTIONThis enterprise involves baking bread for sale. Bread making is the process of mixing ingredients such as wheat-fl our, yeast, salt and water. Afterwards the mixture is cut into different shapes and sizes. Finally the mixture is exposed to heat and baked. Bread products include an assortment of buns and bread and contain valuable nutrients such as proteins, fat, carbohydrates, minerals, salt and vitamins.

BAKERY

MaterialsRaw materials for baking can be bought from grocery shops, market places and wholesalers of grain products.

Work placeFor this, a fl oor space of about 6x6 paces is needed. This should be divided into a store and a sales room. The bak-ing takes place in an oven, which is normally fi xed outside. Furthermore a clean water supply should be available for the production process.

EquipmentThe equipment can be locally constructed and bought from local shops. The equipment may include:• Oven• Charcoal stove• Utensils (sieve, tins, trays) • Weighing scales• Medium-sized working table

PersonnelIdeally three people can run this business and one person should have baking skills.

MarketThe markets for these products are widely spread and include:• Households, Schools• Cafes, Restaurants• Hotels, Shops, Market places

Opportunities• Parties such as weddings & conferences• Public occasions, Quality bread• Supplying contract with restaurants & hotels• Supplying contracts with schools• Village market days

Challenges• Market for bakery products may be limited• Long storage may lead to decay• A lot of heat may be dangerous• Labour is demanding• Individual orders may not be collected

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for the bakery business 300,000 Materials 150,000 Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 50,000 Rent 50,000 Total Amount 550,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000 Materials 150,000 Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 50,000 Transport 50,000 Rent 25,000 Total Amount 285,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Catering Institutes• Established bakeries• Baking books

Page 38: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own38

INTRODUCTIONBasket making involves collecting raw materials, dying them in preferred colours and fi nally weaving or sewing them by using threads and needles into baskets. The baskets are made in various sizes and shapes depending on their purposes.

MaterialsThe common materials are sisal, threads, banana fi bres, palm leaves and papyrus reeds. In urban areas these ma-terials can be bought from markets, whereas in rural areas it can be found in swamps and open fi elds.

Work placeFor this enterprise, a room of about 3x3 paces is needed. Baskets can also be made outside and then stored or distributed for sale. A room of about 2x2 paces will be necessary for the storage.

EquipmentThe equipment needed can be bought from local shops and markets and includes:• Basins• Chair / Mat• Crochet needles• Display table• Knives, Large sewing needle

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run this business, and all of them are involved in production and sales. Personnel should have the knowledge of weaving and designing baskets.

MarketThe market is throughout the year and baskets can be sold at the following places• Curio shops, Craft shops• Hotels, Households • Market places, Working places

Opportunities• Provide quality baskets• Provide unique baskets• Participate in exhibitions, trade fairs• Supply craft shops

Challenges• Access to quality materials is limited• Poor storage may lead to damage• Transportation of raw materials and baskets may be diffi cult

Success StoryAs told by Harriet based in Masaka“I started basket weaving at our home under the guidance of my mother when I was a little girl. My mother wove baskets, mats and other items to earn an additional income for our family. I was a student in senior two when my father passed away. My mother could not afford to pay my school fees anymore. To help my family I also started weaving baskets. I could make about two baskets a week and sold them for 3,000 shillings each. From my own and my mother‘s savings, I could fi nally go back to school till senior four. The school fee for A-levels is even higher and therefore I started weaving baskets again. I opened a shop in Masaka town where I am selling my products. Many tourists buy my quality products such as mats, wall hangings and lampshades. I travel to different towns to sell my products to curio shops. My earnings allow me to cater for the school fees of my younger brother and sister. I have been in this business for almost seven years now.”

Information / Training Provider

• Crafts shops around the country• Established basket makers

BASKET WEAVINGBASKET WEAVING

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the basket weaving business 40,000 Materials 50,000 Transport 10,000 Rent 30,000 Total Amount 130,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 3,000 Materials 50,000 Transport 10,000 Rent 30,000 Total Amount 93,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Page 39: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

39Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThe term biscuit has different names in different countries; it refers to small thin products of varying shapes, sweetened or unsweetened, soft or hard. They are usually sold by weight. This business is about biscuits, which are processed by mixing ingredients like wheatfl our, baking powder, margarine and milk, fl avours, salt or sugar depending on the desired tastes and water. The dough is rolled, cut to preferred shapes and baked in an oven to get the fi nal product, the biscuits.

MaterialsThe raw materials for making biscuits can be found in shops, markets and supermarkets.

Work placeFor this business a fl oor space of about 4x4 paces is needed. This should be divided into a production room and a sales room.

EquipmentThe brick oven can be locally constructed, the working table can be made by a carpentry workshop and other equipment can be purchased in shops and markets. The required equipment may include:• Brick oven• Working table• Rolling pin• Tray• Brush• Cup • Bowl• Basin• Cutter• Weighing scale

PersonnelTwo people can run this business and should have the knowledge of biscuit baking.

MarketThe highest demand for biscuits comes from children. Markets exist in the following places:• Market places• Schools• Shops, Street vending

Opportunities• Best quality biscuits• Supplying contracts with shops, cafes, restaurants, supermarkets

Challenges• Limited market• Biscuits go bad when stored for a long period

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the biscuit business 200,000 Materials 50,000 Utility (Water, Charcoal) 30,000 Transport 20,000 Rent 40,000 Total Amount 340,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000 Materials 50,000 Utility (Water, Charcoal) 30,000 Transport 20,000 Rent 40,000 Total Amount 150,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Catering institutes• Uganda Industrial Research Institute• Established biscuit makers

BISCUIT BAKINGBISCUIT BAKING

Page 40: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own40

BLACKSMITHINTRODUCTIONThis business is about manufacturing and repairing things which are made out of iron. The raw material is mainly scrap me-tallic materials. A Blacksmith heats the them until they are red hot and shapes them by using a hammer to a preferred size. After that the metal is treated by water or oil for hardening. The fi nished products may include knives, spears, arrows, grass cutters, local hammers, traps, farming tools and bicycle carriers.

BLACKSMITH

MaterialsThe required materials are available from workshops, ga-rages, metal companies and households at a small fee.

Work placeFor this business an open space of about 3x3 paces is needed and a room of about 2x2 paces for storage.

EquipmentThe blacksmith can purchase his equipment from hardware shops, tool stores and local markets. The equipment may include: • Chisels• Cutting knife• Hammer• Pliers• Punches• Rings for driving• Steel and iron• Traditional hard stone

PersonnelIdeally, three people can run this business and they should know about different kinds of metal, their reaction to heat and how to shape it.

MarketThe market in urban and rural areas is available throughout the year. Blacksmith items can be sold in the following places• Households• Market places

Opportunities• Manufacture quality items• Manufacture unique items• Supply cultural shops

Challenges• Lack of modern tools• Lack of more effective stone coal• Limited market

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for the blacksmith business 100,000 Materials 30,000 Utilities (Charcoal, fi rewood) 20,000Transport 20,000 Rent 25,000 Total Amount 195,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000 Materials 30,000 Utilities (Charcoal, fi rewood) 20,000Transport 20,000 Rent 25,000 Total Amount 105,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Technical institutes• Vocational centres• Established blacksmiths

Page 41: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

41Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThe brick making business involves mixing clay with water and moulding it to preferred cube shapes. The cubes are left to dry slowly under banana leaves, grass or even plastic sheets, to avoid cracking which lowers quality. The bricks are exposed to the heat of a fi re to harden them, so that the fi nal product is strong enough for construction.

MaterialsThe required soil can be found in swamp areas. Polythene sheets for covering are available in shops and markets.

Work placeFor this business, a plot of land of about 10x10 paces is required, and a shelter for storage should be build.

EquipmentThe equipment needed can be found in hardware shops and markets and normally includes:• Hoes• Jerry cans• Spades• Wheel-barrow• Wooden moulds

PersonnelIdeally, three people can run this business and at least one should know how to make bricks.

MarketThe market for bricks is throughout the year in rural and urban areas. Bricks are mainly sold to construction sites.

Opportunities• Expand the business to masonry• Higher demand at bigger constructions sites like schools and hospitals• Provide quality bricks

Challenges• Consistency in quality standard• Damage during rainy seasons• Easy cracks before sale• Labour intensive• Proper drying process required• Seasonal demand for products

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the brick making business 120,000 Utility (Charcoal, Firewood) 50,000 Rent 40,000 Total Amount 210,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000 Utility (Charcoal, Firewood) 50,000 Rent 40,000Transport 50,000 Total Amount 150,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Mr. Obong Nam of Ngetta Lira.„About fi ve years ago I started the brick making business on my father’s plot of land. It was not so lucrative at that time, but it had a boost when UPE schools were being constructed. A lot of construction companies were involved in building work. These schools approached me to supply them with bricks and this is what I did. When the construction of dispensaries at the sub-county level began, again I was the lucky one to supply most of these construction sites. Today I can comfortably cater for my daily needs and later on I think I will be able to construct a house with my earnings and my bricks.”

Information / Training Provider• Vocational training institutions• Brick making sites• Construction companies

BRICK MAKINGBRICK MAKING

Page 42: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own42

BRIQUETTE MAKINGINTRODUCTIONBriquettes are made out of organic waste such as tree leaves, grass, agricultural residues, and sawdust. Charcoal dust may also be added to improve on the quality of the briquettes. The process involves crushing materials, soaking them in water to soften them and fi nally pressing them into a mould.

BRIQUETTE MAKING

MaterialsThe materials for this business are agricultural residues and fallen leaves; charcoal dust can be bought from charcoal traders.

Work placeBriquettes can be made under a tree although a small room for storing the equipment is required.

EquipmentThe crusher and the briquette press can be fabricated locally with a piece of metal, by a carpentry workshop. The other equipment is available in the local markets.• Crusher• Briquette press• Collecting bags• Panga

MarketBriquettes are a relatively cheap substitute for charcoal and they can be sold to:• Households• Hotels• Restaurants

Opportunities• Increasing sales in different places, including urban areas• Low competition• Low running cost• New product for the market

Challenges• Labour intensive• Poor performance in extreme weather conditions

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for the briquette making business 450,000 Total Amount 450,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 50,000 Total Amount 50,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Uganda Industrial Research Institute• Ministry of Energy

Page 43: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

43Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about manufacturing burglar proofi ng for the open market. Strong materials, such as sheet metal, round and fl at irons are used on gates, doors and windows in order to protect the property. The business requires cutting, bending and welding of iron into required shapes, sizes and designs.

MaterialsThe materials are available form metal trading companies and hardware shops.

Work placeFor this enterprise, a space of about 5x5 paces is needed which should include a store. The production can be done in an open area.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be found at hardware shops and may include:• Hack saw• Hammer• Square• Tape measure• Vice• Welding machine

PersonnelIdeally, three people can run this business and they should have knowledge of welding.

MarketThe market for burglar proofi ng is throughout the year and mostly in urban areas. The burglar proofi ng can be sold in such places as:• Construction companies• Factories• Households• Industries• Offi ce buildings• Shops, Warehouses• Working places

Opportunities• Quality and strong burglar proofi ng• Obtain supplying contracts for various construction sites

Challenges• Competition• Expensive materials• Lack of adequate equipment

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000 Materials 300,000Utility (Electricity) 30,000 Transport 20,000Rent 30,000 Total Amount 4800,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000 Materials 300,000Utility (Electricity) 30,000 Transport 20,000Rent 30,000 Total Amount 400,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Established burglar proofi ng manufacturers• Metal workshops• Technical institutes

BURGLAR PROOFING MANUFACTURINGBURGLAR PROOFING MANUFACTURING

Page 44: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own44

CANDLE MAKINGINTRODUCTIONCandle making involves buying wax and cotton wicks; the wax is heated until it melts and is modelled to form a candle. The commonly used method is with a charcoal stove to provide the required heat.

CANDLE MAKING

MaterialsBees’ wax can be purchased from beekeepers; the kerosene can be bought from petroleum companies or supermarkets. Used candles collected from households or public places can also be utilised to make new candles.

Work placeFor this business, a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed. However, candles can also be made in an open area with only a small room for storage.

EquipmentThe equipment for candle making can be fabricated locally and it may include:• Aluminium mould • Charcoal stove

PersonnelIdeally, three people could run this business and at least one person should have a knowledge of candle making.

MarketThe market for candles is throughout the year. Candles can be sold in the following places• Households• Markets• Shops• Street vending

Opportunities• Cake candle• Long-term supplying contracts with shops• Unique candles supplied for special occasions

Challenges• Initial diffi culties in entering the market• Limited market• Seasonal supply of raw materials (bees’ wax)

Information / Training Provider• Bee farmers• Candle factories• Established candle makers

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 150,000 Materials 150,000 Utilities (Charcoal) 5,000 Transport 10,000 Rent 20,000 Total Amount 335,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000 Materials 150,000 Utility (Charcoal) 5,000 Transport 10,000 Rent 20,000 Total Amount 205,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Page 45: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

45Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTION involves curving and joining pieces of wood using glue and nails, and fi ne fi nishing with oil-varnish.

MaterialsWood is available from timber or wood dealers and other materials from hardware shops.

Work placeFor an enterprise, a fl oor space of about 5x5 paces is needed. This should be divided into a production area, store and sales room. However, furniture can also be made under a simple shelter.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be bought from hardware shops and may include:• Hacksaw blade• Hammer• Hand saw• Plane• Racket press• Screw driver• Table vice

PersonnelIdeally, four people can run this business of whom two people should have knowledge of carpentry.

MarketThere is a market for wooden products throughout the year in urban and rural areas. Furniture can be sold to the following places• Bars, Cafes, Restaurants• Households• Prayer houses• Schools

Opportunities• Better quality furniture, better sales• Repair of household items• Supplying sources for schools and other institutions

Challenges• Limited access to high quality wood• Market in rural places may be limited • Storage needs a lot of space

Start up costsDescription Amount ush.

Basic equipment for acarpentry workshop 150,000 Materials 300,000 Rent (storage and open space) 40,000 Transport 50,000 Total Amount 540,000

Running costsDescription Amount ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000 Materials 300,000 Rent (storage and open space) 40,000 Transport 50,000 Total Amount 410,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Lubega Richard from New Banda Furniture Mart.“Six years ago I started my carpentry workshop under a tree. During that time, I still went to Kyambogo School. I made simple furniture like tables, chairs and stools. This income catered for my basic needs and even part of my school fees. After completing school, I continued with this workshop and rented premises just by the roadside. Today I am the proud owner of premises with a building and more advanced equipment. I am now in the position to sup-ply larger quantities. I sell furniture ranging in price from 80,000 – 1,200,000 Shillings.“

Information / Training Provider• Technical institutes• Established workshops

CARPENTRY WORKSHOPCARPENTRY WORKSHOP

Page 46: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own46

CARVED WOOD PRODUCTIONINTRODUCTIONThis business is about collecting different kinds of wood, modelling the wood into preferred shapes according to a sketch. Sand paper is used to smooth the surface of the wooden product, which may include candle stands, animals of all kinds, stools, wall hangings, etc.

CARVED WOOD PRODUCTION

MaterialsThe required materials can be found at timber dealers, carpentry shops or in the forest.

Work placeFor this enterprise, a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe working table can be made at a carpentry workshop and the other equipment is available from hardware shops and may include:• Chisels• Cutting knife, Hammer, Plane• Sand paper• File• Working table

PersonnelIdeally, three people can run this business, all being involved in the production. They should have knowledge of designing and woodcraft.

MarketThe market for carved wood products is in urban and rural settings throughout the year and may include:• Curio shops, Households• Hotels and Restaurants• Market places, Tourists places• Working places

Opportunities• Supply contracts with tourist shops• Expand business to carpentry workshop• Expand market to exhibitions and trade fares• Provide quality products• Provide unique products

Challenges• Experience and skills are required• Failure to deliver orders in time• Limited access to quality wood• Market in rural areas may be limited • Transportation may be diffi cult

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 70,000 Materials (Wood, Varnish) 110,000 Transport 30,000 Rent 30,000 Total Amount 240,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000 Materials (Wood, Varnish) 110,000 Transport 30,000 Rent 30,000 Total Amount 180,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider • Carpentry workshops• Curio and tourist shops• Established carved wood craftsmen• Vocational training institutions

Page 47: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

47Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONCassava chips making is the process of pealing cassava, cutting it to preferred sizes, washing the slices and fi nally deep-frying it in cooking oil until it is well done and ready for eating. The cassava chips are sold in numbers at fi xed rates. The commonly used method for making cassava chips is to use a charcoal stove or fi re wood for heating.

MaterialsCassava is available in the markets or one can even grow it in the garden. Cooking oil is found in local shops or supermarkets.

Work placeAn open space or shelter of about 2x2 paces is required for this business.

EquipmentThe equipment can be found in local shops and the working table can be made by a carpentry workshop. The equipment may include:• Cutting knife• Deep-frying pan• Ladle• Saucepan• Tray• Working table

PersonnelOne person who knows how to make cassava chips can run this business alone.

MarketThe market for this business is in public areas. Cassava chips can also be sold in the following places:• Cafes, Restaurants• Households • Market places• Schools• Street vending• Working places

Opportunities• Better cassava chips, more customers• Contracts to supply cafes, restaurants• Public occasions and ceremonies• School openings / holidays / break time

Challenge• Limited market• Perishable products• Seasonal raw material (cassava)

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the cassava chips making business 35,000 Materials (Cassava, oil, etc.) 30,000 Utility (Charcoal, Firewood) 10,000 Rent 10,000 Total Amount 85,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000 Materials (Cassava, Oil, etc.) 30,000 Utility (Charcoal, Firewood) 10,000 Rent 10,000 Total Amount 55,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Jane of Bweyogerere“I make cassava chips from the yield of my garden. I grow cassava every season and sell most of it in the market as fresh cassava. Some of it I sell as cassava chips after deep frying them. Every morning I go to the trading centre where I make and sell my chips. I realised that I am the only one who does this kind of business at Bweyogerere station and so I have gained popularity for it. With my earnings I am able to take care of me and of my family’s needs, and I am so pleased that my garden is producing good yields of cassava.”

Information / Training Provider • Established cassava chips makers• Catering institutes

CASSAVA CHIPS MAKINGCASSAVA CHIPS MAKING

Page 48: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own48

CHAPATTI MAKINGINTRODUCTIONThis business involves measuring wheat fl our, mixing it with water and salt, cutting the dough to preferred sizes, rolling it and fi nally frying it in cooking oil. A charcoal stove is commonly used for making chapattis.

CHAPATTI MAKING

MaterialsRaw materials are available at local shops and markets.

Work placeFor this enterprise a fl oor space of about 2x2 paces is needed. However, chapatti can also be made in the open or under a shelter.

EquipmentThe equipment needed can be found in local shops, and a working table can be made by a carpentry workshop. The equipment may include:• Cutting knife• Frying pan• Ladle• Large saucepan (for mixing ingredients)• Rolling pin• Working table

PersonnelIdeally, one person can run this business and should know how to make chapattis.

MarketThe market for this business is throughout the year, mostly in the mornings and evenings. Chapatti can be sold in the following places • Construction sites• Households• Market places• Restaurants• Schools• Shops

Opportunities• Better quality chapatti, better income• Supplying contracts with shops / restaurants• Public occasions / holidays

Challenges• Diffi culties in maintaining constant heat• Easy damage due to water exposure • Quick decay when stored a long time• Limited market

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the business 30,000 Materials 30,000 Rent (open space) 10,000 Utility (Water, Charcoal) 20,000 Total Amount 90,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair & maintenance of equipment 3,000 Materials 30,000 Rent 10,000 Utility (Water, Charcoal) 20,000 Total Amount 63,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by David“I used to start working at 6.00am and press three packets of wheat fl our. I prepared about 70 chapattis per day, which I sold at Banda stage for 200 Shillings a piece. With this income I managed to build a wooden stall, just next to the taxi park. Now I press fi ve packets of wheat fl our daily and make around 30,000 Shillings a day. I am also supplying chapattis to restaurants and cafes around my place. I have a good business in the morning because, a lot of people take their breakfast at my stall. With my income I am supporting my family comfortably and have been able to build a house for my family. With some savings my wife could also open a small stall at the market.”

Information / Training Provider • Baking books• Catering institutes• Established chapatti makers

Page 49: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

49Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThis business is the production of charcoal for sale. It involves cutting trees into logs, piling them up and covering the pile with wet leaves and soil while it is slowly burned. The cover should lie tightly on the pile, not allowing air to enter, otherwise the wood could burn to ashes.

MaterialsThe raw materials can be found from fresh cut trees and at the place you plan to do the burning.

Work placeIdeally, a piece of land of about 6x6 paces and with a reli-able water supply is needed. On this a shelter for storage should be erected.

EquipmentThe equipment can be found at local hardware shops and markets. • Axes• Hoes• Jerry cans• Pangas • Sacks for packing • Wheel-barrow

PersonnelIdeally two people can run the business, both engaged in the production. At least one person should have an idea about the process of burning charcoal.

MarketThe market for charcoal is widely spread but there is more demand in rural areas. Charcoal can be sold in the follow-ing places:• Cafes, Restaurants• Hotels• Households• Market places

Opportunities• Provide quality charcoal• Obtain contracts to supply other areas• Festive seasons• Supply bigger institutions

Challenge• Bureaucratic diffi culties in obtaining license• Labour demanding• Short-term business due to deforestation• Diffi culties in transportation to markets

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for charcoal processing 100,000 Materials 100,000 Rent 30,000 License 30,000 Total Amount 260,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000 Rent 30,000 Materials 100,000 Total Amount 140,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Nammudu Gloria of Nabisunsa, Kampala“My supplier is Mr. Ssengendo Sam who has been dealing in charcoal for the last six years. He started by burning char-coal in Namuyenje, Mukono district. He supplied charcoal in Mukono district and today he and his partner are supplying to most of us retailers of charcoal in Banda and Kireka. A sack of charcoal ranges from 8,000 – 12,000 shillings. They hire a truck for transportation, using the same capital.”

Information / Training Provider • Forestry college• Local forest departments• Ministry of Energy

CHARCOAL MAKINGCHARCOAL MAKING

Page 50: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own50

INTRODUCTIONChicken roasting is the process of buying chickens, slaughtering them, removing the feathers and cutting them to preferred sizes. The meat is properly cleaned, roasted until it is thoroughly cooked, and then sold for a reasonable price. The common method for roasting chicken is on a charcoal stove.

MaterialsChickens are available from poultry farms or from the local market.

Work placeThe chicken roasting business can be done in an open space or a shelter of about 2x2 paces.

EquipmentThe equipment can be found in local shops and markets. The furniture is locally made by carpenters. • Charcoal stove• Cutting knife• Tray• Washing pail• Working table

PersonnelIdeally, one person can run the business and should know how to roast chickens.

MarketThe market for roasted chicken is throughout the year, most-ly in the evenings in places where there are a lot of people. Roasted chicken can be sold in the following places• Households• Restaurants• Roadside markets

Opportunities• Better quality chicken, more customers• Public occasions / holidays

Challenge• Limited market in rural areas• Decay due to long and / or poor storage

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 30,000 Materials 40,000 Rent (Shade) 10,000 Utility (Water, Charcoal) 50,000 Total Amount 130,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000 Materials 40,000 Rent 10,000 Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 50,000 Total Amount 105,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Deo of Kisementi Entebbe.“I dropped out of school in P7 because my mother could not pay my school fees anymore. I could not fi nd a job. At that time our neighbour used to roast chicken in Kisementi, Entebbe town. He was the only one who did this around that place. In accordance with my mother’s advice, I contacted this person and he was willing to teach me how to roast chicken. For about one year we had our business together in front of the Kisementi bars. The demand was very high and my partner told me that I should now start my own business. I found a place in front of a shop where the owner charged some commission. Each day I bought fi ve or six chickens, sliced them into six pieces and sold each piece for about 1,000 Shillings. I tried very hard to offer a better service, so that I would gain popularity. Now I am selling ten chickens a day at a price of 1,200 Shillings per piece. My daily income is around 30,000 Shillings. With this amount I can meet my daily needs and I could even open a small grocery shop for my mother near our house.”

Information / Training Provider • Catering Institutes• Established chicken roasters

CHICKEN ROASTING CHICKEN ROASTING

Page 51: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

51Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

DOUGHNUT FRYINGINTRODUCTIONThis business is about frying doughnuts. The dough in this process is plain bun dough, just a bit stiffer and sweeter than for buns. Doughnuts can be made into several different shapes although the doughnut ring is the most common one. There are several ways of fi nishing the doughnuts such as icing with sugar and water, icing with several colours and fl avours, etc.

DOUGHNUT FRYING

MaterialsThe raw materials can be found in local shops, markets or supermarkets.

Work placeFor this enterprise, a fl oor space of about 4x4 paces is needed. This should be divided into rooms for processing, storage and sales.

EquipmentThe equipment is available in local shops and supermarkets and may include:• Baking trays • Basins• Bowls • Charcoal stove• Cooling rack • Cups• Deep frying pan • Knife• Ladle • Sieve• Working table

PersonnelIdeally, two people with knowledge of doughnut frying can run this business.

MarketThe market for doughnuts is throughout the year. They can be sold in:• Cafes• Hotels• Restaurants• Schools• Shops

Opportunities• Contract to supply shops and markets• Extend the market to other areas• Provide quality doughnuts

Challenges• Labour intensive• Decay due to long and / or poor storage• Limited market • Skills required

Information / Training Provider• Bakeries• Catering institutes• Uganda Industrial Research Institute

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the doughnut frying business 100,000 Materials 50,000 Utility (Water, Charcoal) 40,000 Rent 40,000 Total Amount 230,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000 Materials 50,000 Utility (Water, Charcoal) 40,000 Rent 40,000 Total Amount 140,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Page 52: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own52

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about maintaining, adjusting and repairing radio and television receivers and related audio and visual equip-ment like tape recorders and video cassette recorders, as well as household appliances such as kettles and boilers, etc.

MaterialsMost of the time the clients may bring the materials to the workshop. The needed spare parts can be bought from electronic shops.

Work placeFor this enterprise, a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed, and it needs to be divided into a repair room and a store.

EquipmentThe equipment is available at electronics shops and may include:• Brush • Charger• Electronic tool kit • Knife• Pliers • Screwdriver• Soldering iron • Testers• Volt / Ampere meter • Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business. They should have knowledge of electronics and should be able to identify the problems and repair electronic equipment.

MarketThe market comprises individuals and organisations and may include:• Factories• Hotels• Households• Offi ces• Restaurants

Opportunities• Obtain servicing contracts for factory equipment • Provide quality service

Challenges• Diffi culties in maintaining service standard • Failure of payments• Failure to identify the technical problems • Failure to meet deadlines• Unavailability of spare parts

Start up costsDescription Amount ush.

Basic equipment for the electronic workshop business 100,000 Materials 50,000 Utilities (Electricity) 50,000 Transport 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 250,000

Running costsDescription Amount ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000 Materials 20,000 Utilities (Electricity) 50,000 Transport 20,000Rent 30,000 Total Amount 130,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Electronic workshops• Technical institutes• Technical schools• Vocational schools

ELECTRONIC WORKSHOPELECTRONIC WORKSHOP

Page 53: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

53Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about decorating clothes and textiles with needlework. Beads and coloured threads are applied on clothes and textiles, manually or with a machine.

MaterialsThese can be found in textile shops and markets.

Work placeFor this enterprise, a room of about 3x3 paces is needed.

EquipmentEmbroidery machines can be bought from special household appliance shops. The equipment may include:• Embroidering machine• Needles• Pair of scissors • Yarn• Beads

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run the business and should have knowledge of embroidery.

MarketThere are good markets in cities, towns and trading centres.• Households• Tailors• Boutiques and Fashion designers

Opportunities• Contracts with schools and colleges, e.g. for uniforms• Contracts with tailors and wedding dress makers• Unique and quality products to win more clients

Challenges• Competition• Labour demanding• Limited market in rural areas• Special skills needed

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the embroidery business 400,000 Materials 50,000 Rent 30,000 Total Amount 480,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000 Materials 50,000 Rent 30,000 Total Amount 100,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider • Art institutions• Design institutes• Established tailors• Tailoring institutions

EMBROIDERYEMBROIDERY

Page 54: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own54

FISH BALL MAKINGINTRODUCTIONFish ball making involves removing fi sh scales and intestines; washing and cleaning the fi sh. Then the fi sh is skinned and boned, the meat is thinly sliced and rolled in the form of balls. Fish balls are coated with wheat fl our and cooked by deep fry-ing in cooking oil, and then sold. The most commonly used method for frying fi sh balls is on a charcoal or fi rewood stove.

FISH BALL MAKING

MaterialsFish can be bought from fi shermen or fi sh factories, cooking oil and wheat fl our come from local shops.

Work placeFor this business a shelter of about 2x2 paces is needed for the preparation and production.

EquipmentThe equipment is available in local shops and may include:• Charcoal / fi rewood stove• Cutting knife• Deep frying pan• Ladle• Tray• Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run the business, with both engaged in production and sale of the products. At least one of them should know how to prepare fi sh balls.

MarketThe customers for fi sh balls are mainly found in market places and trading centres. Fish balls can be sold in the following places:• Households • Market places• Trading centres

Opportunities• Increase quantities on market days• Offer other kinds of fi sh such as fresh fi sh, deep-fried fi sh etc.• Provide quality fi sh to attract long-term contracts

Challenges• Labour is demanded• Long storage leads to decay• Market may be limited in some areas• Poor storage leads to decay

Success StoryAs told by Rogers of Nakawa market„I started dealing in fi sh in 1995 here in Nakawa market. I got my fi sh from traders in Kasenyi. Mostly I sell Tilapia and Nile Perch as fresh fi sh. As traders only sell fresh fi sh, I initiated the idea of preparing fi sh by deep-frying them, and making fi sh balls using Nile Perch. Since I was the only person who sold different kinds of fi sh, I attracted many customers. Today I am really making good sales compared to the time when I only sold fresh fi sh. Many people buy fi sh balls since they are well prepared and ready to be consumed. I sell the fi sh balls for three hundred shillings apiece and a whole fi sh ranges from 2,000 – 3,500 shillings each. With this business I am able to sustain my family. I sell fi sh every evening and work as a casual labourer in Transami during the day.“

Information / Training Provider

• Uganda Industrial Research Institute• Established fi sh ball makers• Fish processing companies

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the business 30,000 Materials 45,000 Rent (shade) 10,000 Utility (charcoal, fi rewood, water) 20,000 Total Amount 105,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 3,000 Materials 45,000 Rent (shade) 10,000 Utility (water, charcoal, wood) 20,000 Total Amount 78,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Page 55: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

55Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about frying and fi lleting fi sh and selling it. The scales and intestines of the fi sh have to be removed and then the fi sh has is washed properly. Filleting means slicing the fi sh and removing the bones. The fi sh has to be clean before frying it in the cooking oil. Firewood and charcoal stoves are used to provide the heat.

MaterialsFish is available from fi shermen or from markets.

Work placeFor this enterprise a shelter of about 2x2 paces and a clean water supply are needed.

EquipmentThe equipment can be found in local shops and markets. Furniture is locally made by carpenters. • Cutting knife • Deep frying pan• Firewood • Ladle• Panga • Tray• Weighing scales• Working table

PersonnelIdeally, three people can run this business. At least one should know how to fi llet and fry the fi sh.

MarketThe market for fi sh is throughout the year. It is mostly in the evenings in places where there are a lot of people. Fish can be sold at the following places• Hotels• Households• Restaurants• Eating cafes• Market places

Opportunities• Supply markets and restaurant• Increase number of different kinds of processed fi sh• Provide quality fi sh• Religious seasons like lent

Challenges• High competition• Diffi culties in maintaining hygiene standards• Labour is required• Decay due to poor storage• Expensive raw materials in off-season• Problematic storage

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the business 70,000 Materials 65,000 Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 13,000Rent 10,000Transport 10,000Total Amount 168,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 3,000 Materials 65,000 Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 13,000Rent 10,000Transport 10,000 Total Amount 101,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

FISH FILLETING AND FRYINGFISH FILLETING AND FRYING

Success StoryTold by Olwe of Kitoro market, Entebbe.“I get my fi sh from traders in Kasenyi and then go to the market. Around 1994 there were very few people selling fi sh here. At that time I used to work for a fi sh factory in Entebbe. When the company closed I had learnt how to process differ-ent kinds of fi sh. Then I started to process fi sh fi llets for sale in the market. I sold a kilogram for 3,500 shillings and other different kinds of fi sh such as smoked or even deep fried fi sh. This increased my earnings a lot, and made it possible for me to build a fair house for my family. I get many customers, as I sell different varieties of fi sh.”

Information / Training Provider • Uganda Industrial Research Institute• Catering Institutions• Market authorities• Fish salesmen

Page 56: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own56

FRITTER SHOPINTRODUCTIONThis business is about cooking different kinds of raw products in batter and frying them in cooking oil for about 5 minutes on each side. These can include ripe bananas, boiled eggs, cooked cassava, potatoes, yams, sliced fruits and meat. Icing sugar can be used for decoration.

FRITTER SHOP

MaterialsThe required materials can be found in shops and mar-kets.

Work placeFor this enterprise, a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe equipment is available in shops and markets, and the working table can be made in a carpentry workshop. The equipment may include:• Charcoal stove • Cooling rack• Deep frying pan • Drying cloth• Plastic basins • Plastic bowls• Plastic cup• Rolling pin• Sieve• Tablespoon• Working table

PersonnelIdeally, two people who know how to cook fi tters can run this business.

MarketThe market is throughout the year, in urban and rural areas. Fritters can be sold in the following places:• Cafes / Hotels / Restaurants• Construction sites• Hospitals • Market places• Schools

Opportunities• Supply contracts with schools• Better quality fritters, more customers

Challenges• Diffi culties in maintaining hygiene • Limited market in rural settings• Possible decay due to poor storage

Information / Training Provider

• Catering institutes• Established fritter makers• Uganda Industrial Research Institute

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 50,000 Materials 30,000 Utility (Water, Charcoal) 20,000 Transport 20,000Rent 20,000 Total Amount 140,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000 Materials 50,000 Utility (Water, Charcoal) 20,000 Transport 20,000Rent 20,000 Total Amount 120,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Page 57: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

57Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONGonja (banana) roasting is the process of peeling raw bananas, also called ‚gonja‘, and cooking them until ready to be eaten. Please remember that this kind of banana cannot be eaten without roasting. The common method for gonja roasting is the use of a charcoal stove and a wire mesh where the bananas are spread for roasting.

MaterialsBananas are available from farmers or also from the garden.

Work placeNo premises are necessary to run this business. It can be done under a tree, or a shelter, which should have a size of about 1x1 paces.

EquipmentThe equipment can be bought from local shops and markets and may include:• Charcoal stove (large)• Tray• Wire mesh

PersonnelIdeally, one person who has learned to roast bananas can run this business.

MarketThe best place for this business is on highways, bus sta-tions and taxi parks, although it can also be sold in the following places:• Cinemas• Hotels and restaurants• Market places• Schools• Street vending• Working places

Opportunities• Quality roasted gonja• Business expansion to various places• Public occasions and holidays

Challenges• Requires constant heat• Easy decay when stored a long time• Seasonal product

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for banana roasting business 10,000 Materials 20,000 Utility (Charcoal) 8,000 Total Amount 38,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 3,000 Materials 20,000 Utility (Charcoal) 8,000Total Amount 31,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Nalongo of Bweyogerere Wakiso“About one year ago I planted bananas (‘gonja’) in my garden. Since my children go to school and I am just a housewife, I decided to start roasting gonja here at Bweyogerere stage. I realised that I was the only one with this business. Now I roast ‚gonja‘ at this place every day and into the evening. I sell my roasted bananas to nearby schools as well. The selling price of each ‚gonja‘ is about 100 Shillings. With my good product, I have gained popularity. Each day I sell around two bunches of ‚gonja‘, with earnings of about 10,000 – 15,000 Shillings. My husband is a casual labourer at UGACOF and together we are paying the school fees of our two children. My garden of ‚gonja‘ has greatly expanded and I hope my business will improve as well.”

Information / Training Provider• Catering Institutes• Established banana (gonja) roasters

GONJA (BANANA) ROASTING GONJA (BANANA) ROASTING

Page 58: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own58

GROUNDNUT ROASTINGINTRODUCTIONGroundnut roasting involves sorting groundnuts, placing the nuts in a large saucepan and cooking them ready for eating. Dur-ing the roasting, the seeds are salted. When they have been measured and packed, the groundnuts are sold at a reasonable price. The commonly used method for roasting groundnuts is on a charcoal stove.

GROUNDNUT ROASTING

MaterialsGroundnuts are available from farmers or from local markets.

Work placeFor a small enterprise, a fl oor space of about 2x2 paces is needed. However, groundnut roasting can also be done under shelters, and the nuts transported to various places for sale.

EquipmentThe equipment needed can be bought from local shops and may include:• Charcoal stove• Ladle• Large saucepans• Measuring spoon• Tray

PersonnelIdeally, one person who knows how to roast groundnuts can run the business.

MarketThe market for groundnut roasting is all year round. The groundnuts can be sold in the following places:• Households• Market places• Schools• Shops• Street vending• Working places

Opportunities• Supply contracts with shops and restaurants• Public gatherings, cinemas

Challenges• Quick decay from air exposure once roasted• Limited market• Continuous attention needed when roasting

Success StoryAs told by Anyeko“I roast three kilograms of groundnuts a day and then I measure them with a small tin and fi nally pack them in polythene bags. Each packet cost about 200 Shillings. I move around and sell my roasted groundnuts to shops or just on the street. I get my groundnuts for a reasonable price from Soroti. My daily earnings are 5,000 Shillings. By the end of the day, I can buy food for my family and even dress them. I am hoping to expand my business by establishing a stall to sell raw and roasted groundnuts or even groundnut sauce.”

Information / Training Provider

• Catering institutes• Established groundnut roaster

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the groundnut roasting business 20,000 Materials 22,000 Rent 20,000Utility (Charcoal) 8,000 Total Amount 70,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 2,000 Materials 22,000 Rent 20,000 Utility (Charcoal) 8,000 Total Amount 52,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Page 59: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

59Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONGroundnut sauce making involves sorting the groundnut seeds, pounding and sieving them to get a fi ner sauce for sale. A pestle and mortar are often used to pound the groundnuts, or even better is a grinding machine.

MaterialsGroundnuts are found in shops and markets.

Work placeFor a small enterprise, a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed, divided into a production place and a sales room.

EquipmentThe required equipment is available from local shops and a working table can be made by a carpentry workshop. The equipment includes:• Pestle and mortar• Polyethylene bags• Sieve• Trays• Working table

PersonnelTwo people with knowledge of making groundnut sauce can run this business.

MarketGroundnut sauce is sold throughout the year, though the prices may vary. It can be sold in the following places• Cafes• Hotels• Households• Restaurants

Opportunities• Supply of quality groundnut sauce• Contracts with shops and restaurants• Sales increase during cultural occasions, public holi days, festive seasons

Challenges• Limited market• Decay due to long storage

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 150,000 Materials 50,000 Utility (Electricity) 10,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 240,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000 Materials 50,000 Utility (Electricity) 10,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 31,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success Story“In 1996 I started my business by making groundnut sauce at my house and selling it to the open market. At that time, I used to make fi ve to six kilograms a day. Today I am the owner of a market stall, which sells goods such as salt, sugar, paraffi n, cooking fat and soaps. This was possible through my hard work and I am happy that I can support my family with this business. By the end of this year I would like to buy piglets because I want to try piggery as well.”

Information / Training Provider• Catering institutes• Established groundnut sauce makers

GROUNDNUT SAUCE MAKINGGROUNDNUT SAUCE MAKING

Page 60: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own60

HERBS SHOPINTRODUCTIONFor herb processing it is important to fi nd a particular plant that can cure a disease. If it is found, the plant is uprooted, boiled, sieved and its liquid is poured in bottles to be sold as medicine. The process depends on the type of herb and its nature. The herbs may be medicine for cough, chest pains, stomachaches, headaches etc. Herbs may also be uprooted and sold without processing.

HERBS SHOP

MaterialsThe plants can be found in the forests.

Work placeFor a small enterprise, a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed, divided into a production area and a sales room. Herbs can also be processed and sold without having particular premises.

EquipmentThe equipment needed is available in local shops and a working table can be locally made by carpenters. The equipment may include:• Cutting knife• Measuring cups, Packing bottles• Saucepans and pots• Working table

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run this business. They should know about herbs and herb processing.

MarketThe market for herbs is for all kind of people, but mainly in rural places.

Opportunities• Contracts with herb shops, traditional clinics• Improving skills to expand the market

Challenges• Disrespect by the public• Easy decay if stored too long• Limited market in urban areas• Needs experience and skill

Success StoryAs told by Jjuko“My father was a traditional healer some years ago, but not a witch doctor. He taught us different kinds of herbal medicines used for skin diseases, stomachaches, coughs, chest pains and many others. I mastered all these plants. We only visited a doctor if we didn’t know what kind of sickness we had. We treated diseases such as coughs and toothaches, etc. by using local herbs. After my father passed away, I continued processing most of the herbs he used to make. My father was known for his skills. That is the reason why I am famous. Now I process these herbs and I sell them in my shop at wholesale prices, not like before when we used to run around and sell them to shopping centres and market places. Very many people buy these herbs and resell them to their customers. I opened my a grocery shop for my wife using the earnings from the herb business, and I even support my school-going children.”

Information / Training Provider

• Established herb shops• Parents and elders

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 50,000 Utilities (Water) 3,000 Transport 20,000Rent 30,000 Total Amount 103,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000 Utility (Water) 3,000 Transport 20,000 Rent 30,000 Total Amount 58,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Page 61: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

61Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about mixing the three main ingredients oil or fat, lye (or alkali) and water to make a plain soap. Other ingredients such as herb extracts may be added to give the soap a pleasant odour or colour, or to improve its skin-softening qualities. Extracts from plants, for instance Aloe Vera, Maringa and Neem tree are made by boiling the herbs. These herbs are known for their beauty enhancing and therapeutic values. Almost any fat or non-toxic oil is suitable for manufacturing soap. Common types include animal fat, avocado oil and sunfl ower oil. Lyes can be made from ashes. Some soaps are better if made using soft water, and for these it is necessary to use rainwater or to add borax to tap water.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000 Materials 100,000 Utility (Water, Fuel) 20,000Transport 20,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 280,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 30,000 Materials 100,000 Utility (Water, Fuel) 20,000Transport 20,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 210,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Established soap makers• Faculties of chemistry• Soap factories

HERBAL SOAP MAKING HERBAL SOAP MAKING

MaterialsThe raw materials are mainly plant extracts and animal fat.

Work placeFor this enterprise, a fl oor space of about 4x4 paces is needed, divided into production, storage and sales areas.

EquipmentMost of the equipment can be locally made by a blacksmith. The boiling pans are available in shops and markets. The equipment may include:• Boiling pans• Cloth• Flat wooden boxes• Iron kettle• Kitchen grater• Ladle• Moulds• Plate

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run this business. They should have some knowledge of the chemistry of soap making.

MarketThe market is in rural and urban places. Soap can be sold in the following places:• Households• Market places• Salons• Work places

Opportunities• Provide unique soap• Provide quality soap• Contract to supply beauty salons

Challenges• Initial diffi culties in entering or establishing the market• Good skill of soap making needed• Competition from other soap makers

Page 62: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own62

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about making and repairing jewellery such as rings, brooches, chains and bracelets by cutting, shaping and polishing the raw material for producing fashion jewels. It also involves collecting, designing and decorating beads, horns, met-als, stones, shells and joining them with threads, strings and glue.

MaterialsBeads can be found in shops, whereas shells and stones come from lakes and river sites, horns from animals and metals from scrap.

Work placeFor this enterprise, a space of about 2x2 paces is needed. The products can be made under a shelter, but a storage place is required.

EquipmentThe equipment can be found in local shops and the working table can be made by a carpentry workshop. The equipment may include:• Brush • Needles• Pair of scissors • Sandpaper• Strings • Working table

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run this business. They should know how to make jewellery and be able to identify the proper raw materials.

MarketThe market is constant through the year and can include in the following places:• Beauty shops • Households• Market places • Salons• Street vending • Tourist places• Working places

Opportunities• Provide quality products• Provide unique products• Promote and participate in exhibitions and trade fairs• Obtain long term clients

Challenges• Competition from cheap imported items• Limited market• Orders placed may never be collected• Scarcity of some of the materials

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 60,000 Materials 30,000 Transport 10,000 Rent (shade) 10,000 Total Amount 110,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000 Materials 20,000 Transport 10,000 Rent 10,000 Total Amount 45,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider • Cultural centres• Curio shops• Established businesses• Schools of art

JEWELLERY MAKER JEWELLERY MAKER

Page 63: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

63Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves a shop that is making and selling different kinds of juices, mainly produced from fruits. The fruits are bought, washed and peeled, cut into pieces and squeezed. Sugar is added to give the fi nal product a sweet taste. The juice is measured and poured into containers. The fruits include passion, mangoes, pineapples, bananas, papaw etc. The commonly used method for processing juice is by hand or electrical blender. In addition these shops are selling factory packed ‘ready to drink’ juice.

MaterialsFresh fruits and other materials can be bought from markets, groceries and farmers.

Work placeFor this business a room of about 3x3 paces is needed and also clean water and an electricity supply should be there.

EquipmentThe equipment can be locally constructed and other equip-ment can be bought from local shops. The equipment may include:• Blender• Containers for fi nished products• Fridge for cold juice• Utensils (sieve, knife, cup, spoon, bowl etc.)• Electric kettle• Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run the business and one person should know how to make juice.

MarketThe demand for juice is high during the dry seasons or on hot days. Public places are ideal for this business such as Schools, Restaurants, Working places, Bus and Taxi parks. Juice can also be sold to Households.

Opportunities• Dry hot days• Public occasions• Seasons according to religion• Supply nutritious value juice• Supply super markets and restaurants

Challenges• Consistency in hygiene standards• Limited market• Provide quality juice• Decay due to poor storage• Low sales due to weather conditions

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the juice shop business 350,000 Materials 50,000 Utility (Water, Electricity) 30,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 460,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 25,000 Materials 50,000 Utility (Water, Electricity) 30,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 135,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by David of Bido fruit shop in Bweyogerere“Daily I bought passion fruit of about 2,000 Shillings and made about 30 mugs of juice and fi lled each cup in a polyethylene bag which I sold for 200 Shillings each. I did this from my vil-lage called Kireku and drove it to the shopping centre where at every lunch-hour it is sold. I did this for some months and later I could buy a blender, which helps me to make differ-ent types of juices. I decided to rent a small wooden stall at the shopping centre where I am now based. I even supply restaurants and shops around this area. I am able to pay my rent and even have enough for myself.”

Information / Training Provider• Uganda Industrial Research Institute• Vocational Catering Institutes• Established juice shops

JUICE SHOPJUICE SHOP

Page 64: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own64

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves collecting metallic containers, cutting and shaping them into lanterns, which are used for lighting rooms, buildings, compounds, etc. The lanterns are made out of tins, empty insecticide containers, margarine containers etc.

MaterialsThe raw materials for this production are collected from dust-bins, households and metal manufacturing companies.

Work placeFor the enterprise a shade of about 3x3 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe equipment can be found at hardware shops and tool stores and may include:• Chisels• Cutter• Hammer • Pair of Pliers• Punch• Steel block

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and both should have the knowledge of lantern making.

MarketThere is a higher demand for kerosene lamps in rural areas. The lanterns can be sold in the following places:• Hardware shops• Households• Market places• Security companies

Opportunities• Village market days• Expand the business to other items

Challenges• Getting raw materials is not easy

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 30,000 Materials 10,000 Rent (shade) 15,000 Transport 10,000 Total Amount 65,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 2,000 Materials 10,000 Rent 15,000 Transport 10,000 Total Amount 37,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider • Technical institutes• Established Kerosene lamp manufacturers

KEROSENE LAMP MANUFACTURINGKEROSENE LAMP MANUFACTURING

Page 65: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

65Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about designing and making clothes or fabrics by forming cotton, wool, or yarn threads into connecting loops by hand, using two long needles. The fi nished products may include socks, sweaters, pullovers, gloves or even tablecloths and decorations. The clothes can be either for babies or adults.

MaterialsThreads can be found in shops and markets.

Work placeFor the enterprise a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is required. However knitting can be done in households.

EquipmentA chair/stool can be made by a carpentry workshop and the needles or knitting machine is available in household appliance shops.

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and should have the knowledge of designing and knitting.

MarketThe market for knitted products is mostly during cold sea-sons and can be sold in the following places:• Curio shops• Households• Market places

Opportunities• Provide unique outfi ts• Provide quality outfi ts• Exhibit in trade fairs• Contract for supplying schools

Challenges• Limited access to quality threads• Competition from imported products• Seasonal

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 400,000 Materials 110,000 Rent 30,000Total Amount 540,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000 Materials 110,000 Rent 30,000Total Amount 145,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Tailoring institutes• Established businesses

KNITTINGKNITTING

Page 66: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own66

INTRODUCTIONLeather goods production is the process of making fi nished leather products out of tanned leather. This involves cutting, punch-ing and designing shapes of leather for making a fi nished product. Leather goods may include shoes, bags, belts, bracelets etc. They can be made manually or by using a sewing machine.

MaterialsLeather is found at leather shops or tanneries.

Work placeFor a small enterprise a work shop fl oor space of about 4x4 paces is needed, which should be divided into storage, production, and sales room.

EquipmentA common sewing machine can be found at hardware shops, whereas the other equipment can be locally fabricated.The equipment may include:• Cutting knife • Hammer• Laser bond • Lasting pliers• Pair of scissors• Pincers• Sewing machine• Sharpening stone• Six way punch• Stitching needles• Tape measure• Tax nails• Tough bond• Wooden last

PersonnelIdeally four people can run this business, whereas three are in production and one is in charge of selling. Two people should have the knowledge of making leather goods.

Market• Curio shops• Individuals• Market places

Opportunities• Provide quality leather goods• Exhibitions / Trade Fairs

Challenges• Diffi culty in accessing quality leather• Limited market in rural setting• Failure of payment

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 350,000Materials 100,000Labour 30,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 520,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair & maintenance of equipment 60,000Materials 200,000Labour 30,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 330,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

LEATHER GOODSLEATHER GOODS

Success StoryAs told by Mr. Igga Charles“I began my business in 1987 after obtaining training from the Gombe Technical Institute in Mpigi District. I tried to get help from the Ministry of Rehabilitation, but I could not succeed. Somehow I got about 20,000 Shillings after selling Matoke (bananas). With this amount I could buy simple tools, which enabled me to start my business. Today I am proud to have assets and cash of a value of three million Shillings. I provide on-the-job training for young people for a period of three months. The fee is about 70,000 Shillings. Experience and commitment is very vital for every business.”

Information / Training Provider

• Established businesses• Leather factories• United Nations‘ Industrial Development Organisation

Page 67: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

67Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONLeather tanning is the process of buying animal skin and converting it into leather by treating it with tannic acid. This process involves soaking the animal skins in lime solution to remove the hair. The skins are then fl eshed for taking away the adhering fl esh. Then the skins are tanned with plant extracts or chemicals. Finally the leather is skinned to size, dyed and can be used for making leather goods.

MaterialsSkin is bought from cattle, goat, or sheep farmers or just from hide dealers.

Work placeFor this enterprise a fl oor space of about 5x5 paces is needed, which is divided into a production room, and a store for raw material and fi nished products. There should be reliable water supply.

EquipmentBarrels are available on the open market and other equip-ment can be found in shops and markets. The equipment may include:• Basins • Jerry cans• Knife • Mixing sticks• Plastic drums

PersonnelIdeally three people can run this business and all should know how to tan leather.

MarketThe market may include those who buy tanned leather as raw material for further processing or even fi nal users. Tanned leather can be sold to the following groups:• Leather craftsmen• Leather traders• Shoe companies• Tourist shops• Traditional dance groups• Traditional leather wares

Opportunities• Make traditional leather• Provide a variety of products• Provide quality leather• Make traditional dance costumes with leather

Challenges• Entering the existing market• Losses due to improper work• Expensive raw materials• Requires good training

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 200,000Materials 300,000Utilities (Water) 10,000Rent 50,000Transport 20,000Total Amount 580,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Materials 250,000Utilities (Water) 10,000Rent 50,000Transport 20,000Total Amount 350,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Leather factories• Shoe factories• Established businesses

LEATHER TANNINGLEATHER TANNING

Page 68: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own68

INTRODUCTIONThe process of boiling maize includes harvesting the maize, removing the fi rst layer of peels, laying the maize in a large sauce-pan, pouring water into the saucepan and covering it with banana leaves. The maize is exposed to heat until it is well cooked and is ready for eating. A fi rewood or charcoal stove is used for providing the heat.

MaterialsMaize can be bought from markets or directly from the maize fi elds.

Work placeFor this small enterprise a shade of about 2x2 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe equipment is available at local shops and the working table can be made by a carpenter workshop.• Charcoal / fi re wood stove• Large saucepans• Working table

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business and should know how to boil maize.

MarketThe business totally depends on the harvest seasons. Public places are ideal for this business such as construction sites, schools, market and working places, households and even on the streets.

Opportunities• Market days• Provide quality maize• Public gatherings such as sports events

Challenges• Limited market• Long storage may lead to decay• Maize dries fast when harvested• Lack of raw materials in off-season

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 20,000Materials 20,000Utilities (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 15,000Rent (shade) 10,000Total Amount 65,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 3,000Materials 20,000Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 15,000Rent 10,000Total Amount 48,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MAIZE BOILING MAIZE BOILING

Success StoryAs told by Mwanje of Lugazi town“Every year I plant maize in my two acre fi eld. When the maize is ready for harvesting, I remove the seeds from the maize cob, dry and store them for consumption at home. However, I also boil some of this maize or even sell raw maize at the market. My sales price is about 200 Shillings for a maize cob. During the market days my sales are mostly good. When there is scarcity of food I sell the dry maize for fi rm processing. Every season my harvest is about 7 to10 bags of maize and this has given me enough for my living in the last eight years.”

Information / Training Provider

• Established maize boilers• Family members

Page 69: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

69Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThe steps for roasting maize are harvesting the maize, removing the peels, exposing the maize cob to heat until it is fully roasted and ready for eating. The commonly used method for roasting maize is to use a charcoal stove.

MaterialsMaize can be bought from markets or directly from the maize fi elds.

Work placeFor roasting maize a small shade of about 2x2 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe equipment is available in local shops and the working table can be made by a carpenter workshop.• Charcoal / fi re wood stove• Wire mesh (for roasting)• Working table

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business and should know how to roast maize.

MarketThe business is totally dependent on the harvest seasons. Public places are ideal for this business such as construction Sites, schools, market and working places, households and even street vending.

Opportunities• Market days• Provide quality maize• Public gatherings such as sports events

Challenges• Limited market• Maize dries fast when harvested• Once roasted cannot be kept till the next day• Transportation may be diffi cult

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 20,000Materials 20,000Utilities (Charcoal, Firewood) 10,000Rent (shade) 10,000Total Amount 60,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 3,000Materials 20,000Utility (Charcoal, Firewood) 10,000Rent 10,000Total Amount 43,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Established maize roasters• Family members

MAIZE ROASTING MAIZE ROASTING

Page 70: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own70

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about mandazi making, where ingredients such as wheat fl our, baking powder, salt, eggs, milk and water are mixed. The dough is rolled and cut into preferred sizes and fi nally deep-fried in cooking oil until it is ready to be eaten. The commonly used method for mandazi making is by using charcoal stove or fi re wood.

MaterialsMaterials can be bought from local shops and markets.

Work placeFor the enterprise a fl oor space of about 2x2 paces is needed. However, mandazi can also be made in an open space or under a shade.

EquipmentThe equipment needed can be found in local shops, for example a working table can be made by a carpentry workshop. • Charcoal stove/fi re wood • Cutting knife• Ladle • Large saucepan• Measuring cup • Rolling pin• Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business, and one should know how to make mandazi. Both are engaged in produc-tion and sales.

MarketThe market for this business is throughout the year, but high demands come during school days. Mandazi can be sold in the following places: • Cafes / Restaurants• Households• Market places• Schools• Working places

Opportunities• Contract for supplying shops / restaurants• Expand market to various places• Increase the production during public occasions and ceremonies• Provide quality mandazi

Challenges• Labour demanding• Limited market• Decay due to long storage

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 30,000Materials 50,000Utilities (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 20,000Total Amount 100,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 2,000Materials 50,000Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 20,000Total Amount 72,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MANDAZI FRYINGMANDAZI FRYING

Success Story“I press two packets of baking fl our every morning and fry man-dazi. I don’t have a fi xed shop for my business, so I am preparing the mandazi at 6.00am in the morning at my house. Later on I get on my bike and ride as far as Kampala to sell my mandazis. Every morning I supply shops in Ssetta and Bweyogerere. I built a wooden box for transporting them and named my business “mobile bakery”. First it was a bit challenging due to my age and the fact that I am a boy. I wondered what my friends would say if they would see me selling mandazis. After some experience and the earnings I can make, I do not regret having started this business. I am able to take care of my daily needs and further for the road licence for my bike”.

Information / Training Provider

• Catering institutes• Established mandazi fryers

Page 71: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

71Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about collecting sisals, drying and dying them to preferred colours and fi nally weaving the sisals into different kinds of mats. They can also be made with used threads, which are dried and sewed together with a needle. Another option for making mats is using banana fi bres, which are woven together. The commonly used method for making mats is by hand.

MaterialsMaterials are locally available and can be found in swamps and banana plantations.

Work placeFor a small enterprise a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed. Mats can also be made under shades or ve-randas.

EquipmentThe needed equipment can be bought from shops and they may include:• Basins• Knives• Sewing needles

PersonnelIdeally three people can run this business and should know how to make mats.

MarketThe market is throughout the year. Mats can be sold in the following places• Curio shops• Hotels• Households• Market places• Working places

Opportunities• Provide unique mats• Provide quality mats• Expand market to exhibitions, trade fares• Contracts to supply curio shops

Challenges• Limited access to quality sisals• Requires a lot of space for storage• Poor transportation may lead to damage• Transportation may be diffi cult

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the mat making business 20,000Materials 30,000Transport 10,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 90,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 2,000Materials 30,000Transport 10,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 72,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Established businesses• Curio shops

MAT MAKINGMAT MAKING

Page 72: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own72

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves collecting and cutting cushions, sofas, mattresses, and packaging materials into smaller pieces, for making upholstery. A binding mixture is made by using chemicals like polyol, activator and water. This binding mixture is then mixed with the mattress chips. The mixture is compressed altogether for an hour. Then the recycled mattress is allowed to cure for 48 hours.

MaterialsThe chemicals required can be purchased from petroleum companies. Second hand mattresses and packaging ma-terials can be collected or bought from households and manufacturing companies’ residues.

Work placeFor this shop a fl oor space of about 6x6 paces, divided into production and storage areas, is needed.

EquipmentThe equipment can be locally made or is available in local markets and may include:• Chemical containers • Chisel• Cutting knives • Gloves• Hammer • Pair of scissors• Plastic drums • Pliers

PersonnelIdeally four persons can run this business and they should have the knowledge and skills in recycling foam mattresses and mixing chemicals.

MarketThe market for recycled mattress is steady throughout the year and they can be sold in the following places• Households• Prisons• Restaurants• Boarding Schools• Upholstery shops, Furniture workshops

Opportunities• Provide quality cushions• Provide quality mattresses• Provide unique mattresses in size and shape• Supply for furniture workshops• Supply hotels

Challenges• Limited market in rural areas• Requires training, skills and knowledge• Competition

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 150,000Materials (Chemicals, used mattresses) 300,000Utilities (water) 20,000Transport 20,000Rent 60,000Total Amount 550,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 100,000Utility (water) 20,000Transport 20,000Rent 60,000Total Amount 210,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MATTRESS RECYCLINGMATTRESS RECYCLING

Information / Training Provider

• Established businesses• Foam industries• Petroleum companies

Page 73: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

73Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about adding value to raw meat. Processed meat products are those made out of de-boned meat, which is ground to a certain size, mixed with other non-meat materials like starch, spices (onions, curry powder) etc. The fi nal mixture is formed into different shapes and sizes and fried or roasted to get the fi nal products such as burgers, meat balls, sausages, etc.

MaterialsFresh beef, goat , pork, and mutton meat are available at slaughter houses in urban settings. In rural areas one may also slaughter his/her animals after getting the approval of a veterinary assistant. The other materials can be found at local markets.

Work placeFor this enterprise a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces with constant water supply is needed, which is to be divided into a storage, production- and salesroom.

EquipmentThe cutting board and the working table can be made by a carpentry workshop; other equipment can be bought from local shops. The equipment may include:• Axe • Bone saw• Burger form • Cutting knife• Cutting log • Sharpeners• Weighing scale • Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business. They should be able to keep the sales place clean and should have the knowledge about meat, hygiene standards and related activities.

MarketThe market is throughout the year and focused in busy places, such as• Cafes, hotels, restaurants • Households • Markets • Schools • Shops, trading centres • Working places

Opportunities• Parties • Public occasions• Quality products, better reputation• Supply contracts with restaurants, cafes• Supply contracts with supermarkets

Challenges• Market for meat products may be limited• Long storage may lead to decay• Individual orders may not be collected

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 150,000Materials (Meat, Spices, etc.) 100,000Utility (Water) 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 300,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Materials (Meat, Spices, etc.) 100,000Utility (Water) 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 170,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Catering institutes• Established meat processors• Hotels and restaurants• Uganda Industrial Research Institute

MEAT PROCESSINGMEAT PROCESSING

Page 74: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own74

INTRODUCTIONThe process of roasting meat includes buying the meat from butcheries in kilograms, slicing it into preferred sizes, fi xing it onto shaped sticks, salting and fi nally exposing it to heat until it is ready to be eaten. Normally a charcoal stove is used for the heating.

MaterialsFresh meat is available in butcheries and slaughterhouses in urban settings. In rural areas one may even slaughter his/her animal after getting the approval of a veterinary assistant.

Work placeFor this enterprise a stall or an open space of about 2x2 paces is needed.

EquipmentWorking tables can be purchased at furniture workshops. Roasting requirements can be bought at local markets and may include:• Charcoal stove • Cutlery• Cutting knife • Plates• Well-shaped sticks • Working table

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business. The person should have the knowledge and skills for roasting meat; hygiene standards and good communication skills.

MarketThe business has high demand throughout the year. The peak demand is near recreation places. Roasted meat can be sold in the following places:• Along highways• Bars, Eating cafes• Colleges, Universities• Market places• School canteens• Street vending

Opportunities• Market days• Provide quality meat • Public occasions and gatherings

Challenges• Competition• Limited market• Once roasted cannot be kept until the next day• Decay due to long and poor storage

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 20,000Materials (Meat, Spices) 30,000Utilities (Charcoal) 8,000Transport 10,000Rent (open space) 10,000Total Amount 78,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 3,000Materials 20,000Utility (Charcoal) 8,000Transport 10,000Rent 10,000Total Amount 51,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MEAT ROASTINGMEAT ROASTING

Success Story As told by Innocent of Namawojolo market.“In 1997 I started roasting meat along the road side, where I sold mostly to travellers. This was diffi cult at that time, because the market was not popular. But later many people joined the market and sold various foodstuffs such as roasted chicken, chapatti, roasted banana (gonja) and many others; the market has now become very popular with travellers. I cut meat into pieces and fi x about six pieces on each stick. I sell each stick for 300 shillings and make around 20,000 shillings daily. It is quite profi table.”

Information / Training Provider

• Established meat roasters• Catering institutes

Page 75: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

75Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about mixing ingredients such as wheat fl our, yeast, salt and water. Then the mixture is moulded into a certain shapes and sizes and cooked, usually in a charcoal stove. A good muffi n must have square edges, brown colour with white sides and a light soft texture. The thickness should be in the range of about 2.5 to 4 cm. They are grouped under ‘hot plate bread’.

MaterialsThe materials can be found in shops and supermarkets.

Work placeFor this enterprise a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces with water supply is needed, which is to be divided into a produc-tion, sales, and storeroom.

EquipmentThe working table can be made by a carpentry workshop and the other equipment is available at local shops and markets. The equipment may include:• Big bowls• Charcoal stove• Cloth material• Cooling trays• Knife• Plastic cups• Whisk• Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and should have the knowledge of making muffi ns.

MarketMuffi ns can be sold in the following places• Schools• Market places• Households

Opportunities• Provide quality muffi ns• Contracts for supplying schools, restaurants• Supply in bulk during public occasions or markets village days

Challenges• Market for muffi ns may be limited• Long storage may lead to decay• Danger of burning due to overheating• Labour demanding• Individual orders may not be collected

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the muffi n business 150,000Materials 70,000Utility (Water, Charcoal) 8,000Transport 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 278,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials 70,000Utility (Water, Charcoal) 8,000Transport 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 133,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Catering institutes• Uganda Industrial Research Institute• Established muffi ns makers

MUFFIN MAKINGMUFFIN MAKING

Page 76: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own76

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves making packaging materials out of textile, cotton, wood, leaves, metal, glass, polyethylene, paper and cardboard etc. The fi nished product depends on the technical properties of these materials, as well as the cost and availability in a particular area. Furthermore, there may also be particular marketing reasons for choosing a certain type of packaging materials. The materials are put together using glue, cello tape, pins and threads.

MaterialsThe raw materials can often be collected from shops, after they have unpacked their merchandise or in indus-tries, which discard the packing after removing their raw materials.

Work placeFor this enterprise a store space of about 3x3 paces is needed. The ranging of materials can be done in an open place.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be bought from shops and markets and they may include:• Hammers • Needles and pins• Pair of pliers • Pairs of scissors• Cello tape / glue

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and should be able to study the market in order to provide appropriate packages.

MarketThe market for packaging materials is in urban and rural areas and the clientele may include:• Agriculturists • Households• Market places • Shops• Tourist shops • Shipping companies• Moving companies

Opportunities• Contract for supplying special shops• Make stronger packaging materials• Provide bigger containers• Provide packaging materials for large organisations• Provide quality materials• Provide unique packaging materials

Challenges• Competition with imported materials• Limited market• Low profi t margin• Non availability of raw materials

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 20,000Materials 100,000Transport 20,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 160,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 100,000Transport 20,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 150,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

PACKGING MATERIALS PRODUCTION PACKGING MATERIALS PRODUCTION

Information / Training Provider

• Established businesses for packaging materials• Factories for packaging materials• Tourist shops

Page 77: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

77Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONPancake making involves making dough by mixing ingredients such as cassava fl our, ripe bananas, sugar and water, then roll-ing and cutting the dough to preferred sizes and fi nally frying it in cooking oil. The commonly used method for pancake frying is by using a charcoal stove and fi rewood.

MaterialsRaw materials are available in local shops and markets.

Work placeFor the enterprise a fl oor space of about 2x2 paces is needed. However, pancakes can also be made in an open shade and distributed for sale. There should be a source of clean water.

EquipmentThe needed equipment can be found in local shops and markets. A working table can be made by a carpentry workshop. The equipment may include:• Charcoal / fi rewood stove• Deep frying pan• Ladle• Rolling pin• Saucepans• Trays• Working table

PersonnelIdeally one person can run the business and should have knowledge of making pancakes.

MarketThe market for this business is throughout the year and mostly in schools. Pancake can be sold at the following places• Cafes / Restaurants• Construction sites• Market places• Schools• Working places

Opportunities• Distribute to a larger market• Increase quantities during public occasions• Provide quality pancakes

Challenges• Limited market• Easy decay due to long storage

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the pancake business 20,000Materials 20,000Utilities (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 10,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 70,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials 20,000Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 10,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 55,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Catering institutes• Established Pancake makers

PANCAKES (KABALAGALA)PANCAKES (KABALAGALA)

Page 78: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own78

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves making peanut butter for sale. The process of making peanut butter is as follows: First the ground-nuts are sorted and roasted. The groundnuts are then left to cool down after which the husks are removed. Finally the nuts are ground into butter using a machine or grinding stones. This butter can also be made from a mixture of Groundnuts and Sesame.

MaterialsGroundnuts are bought form markets, shops and farmers.

Work placeFor this business a room of about 3x3 paces is needed, and electricity is required to drive the grinder.

EquipmentThe grinding machine can be locally fabricated and the other parts can be bought from shops. The equipment may include:• Containers for fi nished products• Grinding machine• Ladle• Sauce pans• Trays• Weighing scale• Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run the business. One person should know how to make peanut butter.

MarketThe market is high when children go to school as the peanut butter is good with bread for the children. Peanut butter can be sold in these places:• Groceries• Households• Market places• Schools• Shops and supermarkets

Opportunities• Increase quantities during market days, school opening days• Provide a quality product and give good customer service to gain loyal customers• Participation in food exhibitions

Challenges• Hygiene to be maintained• Needs care to avoid pests and decay• Packing is sometime a problem

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the peanut butter processing business 350,000Materials 100,000Utility (Water, Electricity, Charcoal, Firewood) 50,000Rent 30,000Transport 10,000Total Amount 540,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair & maintenance of equipment 20,000Materials 100,000Utility (Water, Electricity, Charcoal, Firewood) 40,000Rent 30,000Transport 10,000Total Amount 200,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

PEANUT BUTTER MAKINGPEANUT BUTTER MAKING

Success StoryAs told by Carol Ochaya of Nyabingwa Peanut processing Banda“I started processing peanut butter using the traditional method which we use in Acholiland, meaning the grinding stones. I made peanut butter for a lot of pupils. I earned a lot of money at the beginning of each the term. I ground peanut butter for 400 shillings a kilogram. With this and the help of my husband I managed to secure a grinding machine of 400,000 Shillings. Today I produce about 50 kilograms of peanut butter, and fi ll it into containers. The sales price per tin varies from 1,000 to 5,000 Shillings. With the earnings I can support my family and even pay school fees for my children.“

Information / Training Provider

• Established peanut butter makers• Food catering schools

Page 79: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

79Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about planning, co-ordinating and performing pet farming operations; breeding and raising pets such as dogs, cats, rabbits etc. for sale. The pets are fed and treated for better grades.

MaterialsRaw materials are available in local shops and markets.

Work placeFor this enterprise a shelter with water supply of about 3x3 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be bought from markets and hardware shops and may include:• Basins• Feeding troughs• Hammer• Iron sheets• Spade• Wire mesh• Dog leash

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business. The person should love animals and should be able to identify diseases.

MarketThe market for pets is both in rural and urban areas.• Households• Farms• Security companies• Factories

Opportunities• Raising healthy, good quality animals to attract a larger market• Supplying foreigners

Challenges• Pets may die due to infections• Labour demanding• Pets need care and personnel commitment

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 200,000Materials (Drugs) 50,000Rent (shelter) 15,000Utilities (Water, Feeds) 55,000Total Amount 320,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Materials (Drugs) 50,000Rent 15,000Utility (Water, Feeds) 50,000Total Amount 135,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Agricultural schools• Pet owners• Vet offi cials

PET FARMINGPET FARMING

Page 80: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own80

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about framing print-outs such as certifi cates, artwork, paintings, photographs and needlework according to the clients’ request. The timber and glass have to be cut to the right specifi cations. The wood is then joined with nails and/or glue. Finally clamps and fastens are attached for hanging the fi nished frame.

MaterialsTimber can be bought from wood dealers or carpentry workshops and the glass from hardware shops.

Work placeFor this enterprise a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed. However, picture frames can also be made in an open space.

EquipmentThe required equipment, which is available at hardware shops, may include:• Carving tools (for wood) • Hand saw• Painting brushes • Pencils• Planner • Small hammer• Steel ruler • Tape measure• File

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and should have the knowledge of making frames.

MarketThe market for picture frames is throughout the year and mostly in urban areas. Picture frames can be sold at the following places • Curio shops • Hotels• Households • Market places• Photo studios • Restaurants• Street vendors • Working places

Opportunities• Provide unique picture frames• Provide quality picture frames• Contracts with photo studios and curio shops• Expand market to exhibitions, trade fairs

Challenges• Lack of modern tools• Limited market• Limited access to quality wood• Big space for storage• Damage due to poor transportation• Diffi culty in transportation

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 50,000Materials 50,000Transport 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 150,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 50,000Transport 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 110,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

PICTURE FRAMES PICTURE FRAMES

Information / Training Provider

• Carpentry workshops• Curio shops• Established picture frame makers• Technical institutes

Page 81: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

81Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONPopcorn making involves mixing corn and oil and exposing the mixture to heat to make popcorn. It can also be processed alone with steam. Salt is added to give it a better taste. The commonly used method is using a charcoal stove and immersing the corns in a large saucepan. Popcorn contains valuable nutrients such as carbohydrates, mineral salt and fat.

MaterialsCorn and oil can be bought from shops, supermarket and market places.

Work placePopcorn can be made on a veranda or under a shade. If one wants to use an electric stove, a constant electric supply is needed.

EquipmentEquipment is available in local shops and markets. • Charcoal stove (Electric stove)• Ladle• Measuring cup• Packing bags• Saucepans• Tray

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and should have the knowledge of popcorn making and should possess good communication skills.

MarketThe market for popcorns is throughout the year and popcorn can be sold at the following places• Bars • Cafes• Households • Kiosks• Schools • Street vending

Opportunities• Public occasions and gatherings• Quality popcorn for a wider market• School openings• Supplying contracts with shops, hotels

Challenges• Competition• Decay due to long and poor storage• Lack of storage facilities• Limited market• Losses if exposed to excessive heat

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 60,000Materials 20,000Utility (Charcoal) 5,000Utility (Electricity) 15,000Rent 5,000Total Amount (without Electricity) 90,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 4,000Materials 20,000Utility (Charcoal) 5,000Utility (Electricity) 15,000Rent 5,000Total Amount (without Electricity) 34,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Catering institutes• Established popcorn makers• Restaurants / Hotels

POPCORN MAKINGPOPCORN MAKING

Page 82: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own82

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about buying pork from piggery farms or slaughter houses in large quantities at a wholesale price and selling it in smaller quantities at a higher price per kilogram.

MaterialsFresh pork is available from piggery farms or slaughter houses in urban settings. In rural areas one may slaughter his own animals after getting the approval of a veterinary assistant.

Work placeFor this enterprise a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces with constant water supply is needed, The space is then divided into a storage and sales room.

EquipmentThe cutting log and the working table can be made by a carpentry workshop and the other equipment can be found at local shops. The equipment may include:• Axe • Cutting knives• Cutting log • Hooks• Panga • Sharpeners• Weighing scale • Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business. They should be able to keep the sales place clean and should have the knowledge about meat, hygiene standards and related activities.

MarketThe market is available throughout the year and higher demands come up during festive seasons. The products can be found in the following places:• Bars • Cafes, Hotels• Households • Restaurants

Opportunities• Sales of quality meat• Supplying contracts with hotels, grocery stores and restaurants • Public or family functions

Challenges• Hygiene standards• Decay due to poor and long storage• Limited market

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000Materials (Pork, Packing bags) 80,000Utilities (Water) 15,000Transport 30,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 255,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials (Pork, Packing bags) 80,000Utilities (Water) 15,000Transport 30,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 165,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

PORK BUTCHERYPORK BUTCHERY

Information / Training Provider

• Pork butcheries • Uganda Industrial Research Institute

Page 83: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

83Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThe process of pork roasting involves buying the pork from butcheries in kilograms, slicing it into preferred sizes, fi xing it on the shaped sticks, salting and fi nally exposing it to heat until it is ready to be eaten. The commonly used method for roasting pork using a charcoal stove. Pork can be served alone or with vegetables and cassava.

MaterialsFresh pork is available at butcheries and slaughterhouses or it can be bought from pig farms.

Work placeFor the enterprise an open space of about 3x3 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe equipment is available in local shops and markets and they include:• Charcoal stove (large)• Cutlery• Cutting knives• Folks• Hooks• Plates• Wash basin• Well-shaped sticks• Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and they should have the knowledge and skills for roasting pork, hygiene standards and good communication skills.

MarketHigh demand for roasted pork is in the evenings, during fes-tive seasons and on public holidays. Pork is mostly served in the following places• Bars • Cafes• Restaurants • Trading centres

Opportunities• Market days• Provide quality pork meat• Better services for more customers• Public occasions and gatherings

Challenges• Competition• Limited market• Once roasted cannot be kept until the next day• Decay due to long and poor storage

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 50,000Materials (Pork, Spices) 100,000Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 30,000Transport 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 230,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 3,000Materials (Pork, Spices) 100,000Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 30,000Transport 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 183,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Catering institutes• Uganda Industrial Research Institute• Established pork roasters

PORK ROASTINGPORK ROASTING

Page 84: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own84

INTRODUCTIONPottery is the process of mixing clay with water; and shaping this mixture into pottery products such as pots, cups, plates, bowls, candleholders and fi gures. The modelled objects are then exposed to heat. In Uganda, the most commonly used meth-od for making pottery is by hand, shaping tools and paints for decorating. Pottery products are used for decoration, household utensils, fl ower vases etc. Pottery products are fragile and need to be handled with care.

MaterialsClay is usually obtained from swamp areas.

Work placeFor this business a store and sales room of about 3x3 paces are needed. For the production process, a reliable source of water is required.

EquipmentThe kiln is locally constructed and it may be oiled or wood fi red. The table can be bought from a carpenter. The kick wheel is locally made and other equipment can be bought from shops or markets. The equipment may include:• Basins• Hoe• Kick wheel• Kiln• Medium working table• Plastic sheets (banana leaves or grass may be used to cover the soil)• Shaping objects

PersonnelIdeally three people can run the business and at least one person should have the knowledge of pottery work. One person is the team-leader and others are involved in the production of pottery and collection of raw materials.

MarketThe market for these products may include:• Curio shops • Hotels• Households • Market places• Restaurants • Working places

Opportunities• Provide quality and unique pottery• Expand market to exhibitions / trade fares• Take up special orders

Challenges• Limited market in rural settings• Limited access to high quality clay• Potential damage due to poor storage or transportation

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the pottery business 150,000Materials 30,000Utility (fi re wood, oil, water) 50,000Rent 30,000Transport 100,000Total Amount 360,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Materials 30,000Utility (fi re wood, oil, water) 50,000Rent 30,000Transport 100,000Total Amount 230,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

POTTERYPOTTERY

Success StoryAs told by Mwanje Sam“I started pottery on a piece of land where I partly constructed my house. I basically made small pottery ware due to easy transportation. With my income I could afford the basic needs for my family. Thanks to my commitment and hard work my business was growing and today I am proud that I make fairly big pottery ware such as fl ower vases for hotels. I comfortably support my family from my business nowadays.”

Information / Training Provider

• Traders in Kajansi• Established pottery dealers

Page 85: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

85Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONCarts are used for transporting different kinds of materials. Cart making involves the process of joining measured wood pieces by using nails and a hammer to produce a box about one pace wide. Handles are fi xed on each side-wall. The box is joined to an axle with wheels from an old car.

MaterialsThe wood is available from timber dealers or carpentry shops and other materials from hardware shops.

Work placeFor an enterprise a fl oor space of about 4x4 paces is need-ed. However, carts can also be made under a shade with just a room of about 2x2 paces for the storage of tools.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be bought from hardware shops and may include:• Hammer• Hand saw• Panga• Planner

PersonnelIdeally three people can run this business, and all are engaged in the production and in sales. At least one should have the knowledge of making carts.

MarketThe market comprises of people who carry and transport different things. It is very common in busy areas.• Market places• Shopping centres

Opportunities• Good quality carts provide opportunity for long term earnings

Challenges• Expensive materials• Limited market

Information / Training Provider• Carpentry shops• Established push cart producer

PUSH CART PRODUCTIONPUSH CART PRODUCTION

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the push cart business 100,000Materials 100,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 240,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 100,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 150,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Page 86: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own86

INTRODUCTIONThis bakery business involves weighing and mixing ingredients such as fl our, sugar, eggs, baking powder, margarine and fat to form a batter. The mixture is poured into baking trays and baked in an oven until they are done.

MaterialsThe materials can be found at markets, local shops and supermarkets.

Work placeFor this enterprise a fl oor space of about 5x5 paces is needed and divided into a production area, sales-, and store-room.

EquipmentThe working table can be made in a carpentry workshop, whereas the brick oven is fabricated by a mason at the production site. Other equipment is available in local shops and markets. The equipment may include:• Baking trays • Brick oven• Cake tins • Cooling rack• Hand whisk • Piping tube• Plastic bowls • Shelves• Sieve • Trays• Wooden spatula • Working table• Weighing scale

PersonnelIdeally three people can run this business and they should have knowledge of baking cakes.

MarketThe market for queen cakes in rural and urban settings is throughout the year. They can be sold in the following places• Construction sites • Hotels / Restaurants• Shops • Working places

Opportunities• Supplying contracts for parties, hotels, restaurants• Increase the cake varieties• Provide quality products • Village market days

Challenges• Damage due to excessive heat• Individual orders may not be collected• Labour intensive • Decay due to long storage• Limited market for queen cakes• Requirements of skills and experience

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 300,000Materials 100,000Utility (Water, Charcoal) 40,000Transport 30,000Rent 50,000Total Amount 520,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 100,000Utility (Water, Charcoal) 40,000Transport 30,000Rent 50,000Total Amount 230,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

QUEEN CAKE MAKINGQUEEN CAKE MAKING

Information / Training Provider

• Catering institutes• Uganda Industrial Research Institute• Established bakeries

Page 87: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

87Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONSamosa making involves measuring wheat fl our, mixing it with water and salt to form dough, cutting and rolling the dough into preferred sizes. Ingredients such as beef, pork, peas, and potatoes, are mixed with spices and stuffed in the rolled mixture and fi nally fried in cooking oil. The commonly used method for making samosas is using charcoal stove.

MaterialsAll the materials are available in local shops and markets.

Work placeFor this enterprise a fl oor space of about 2x2 paces is needed. However, samosas can also be made in an open space or under a shade.

EquipmentThe equipment can be found in local shops and a work-ing table can be made by a carpentry workshop and may include:• Charcoal stove • Cutting knives• Deep frying pan • Ladle• Large saucepan • Rolling pin• Tray • Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business; both engaged in production and sales. At least one person should have the knowledge of making samosas and keeping the workplace clean.

MarketThe market for samosas is available throughout the day and can be sold in the following places• Cafes• Hotels • Households• Restaurants• Schools• Shops• Working places

Opportunities• Better quality, better income• Public occasions• Supplying contracts with shops, restaurants

Challenges• Decay due to long and poor storage• Limited market• Not easily preserved

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 40,000Materials 40,000Utility (Water, Charcoal) 10,000Transport 10,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 120,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 3,000Materials 40,000Utility (Water, Charcoal) 10,000Transport 10,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 83,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

SAMOSA MAKING SAMOSA MAKING

Success StoryAs told by Maria of Kireka Kampala.“I started making samosas at my home here in Kireka and selling them along the roadside. I stuffed them with beef and vegetables and sold the vegetable samosas for 100 Shillings and the beef samosas for 200 Shillings. I did this for some time. I informed shops and restaurants about my business. Since the quality and taste of my samosas was good, I got supplying contracts for shops and restaurants. I fi nally stopped selling along the roadside and this made my work easier and still my earning are high enough to cater for our daily needs together with my husband‘s income.”

Information / Training Provider• Catering institutes• Established Samosa makers• Hotels and restaurants

Page 88: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own88

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves collecting scrap metal, sorting, straightening (if necessary), and selling it with a profi t margin to metal workshops, local craftsmen and trading centres.

MaterialsThe materials are obtained as scraps and cut offs from metal workshops, packaging materials and old tools.

Work placeFor this enterprise an open space as store of about 4x4 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe equipment can be purchased from hardware shops and may include:• Chisel• Hammer• Sacks• Screw driver• Spanner• Weighing scale• Wheel-barrow

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business and should be able to identify and value the materials.

MarketThere is a wide market for scrap metal if collected in large quantities and can be sold in the following places• Aluminium factories• Aluminium workshops• Local craftsmen• Steel making plants

Opportunities• Supplying contacts with scrap companies• Supplying contracts with steel factories

Challenges• Knowledge and skills of identifying the materials• Labour demanding• Limited market• Transportation may be diffi cult

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 150,000Materials 200,000Transport 100,000Rent (open space) 20,000Total Amount 470,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 200,000Transport 100,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 330,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

STEEL RECYCLINGSTEEL RECYCLING

Information / Training Provider

• Shumuk enterprises Kampala• Steel rolling mills• Uganda Industrial Research Institute• Vocational training institutions

Page 89: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

89Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThe stone and sand excavation business involves getting sand from river and lakesides and selling it to individuals. Stones can be excavated from rocky places, broken into smaller pieces and sold per heap . The price charged for sand and stones will depend on the size and quality. Stones and sand are used for construction activities.

MaterialsSand has different characteristics depending on the source. It may be obtained from lakes, rivers or swamps, whereas stones are available from rocky areas.

Work placeFor this enterprise a piece of land of about 6x6 paces is needed where the sand and stones are stored and measured for sale.

EquipmentThe equipment can be bought from hardware shops, tool stores and local markets and may include:• Chisels• Hand hoe• Pick axes• Sacks• Shovels• Wheel-barrow

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business; both engaged in collecting and selling sand and stones. The personnel should have knowledge of identifying sand and stones for construction work.

MarketThe market is available throughout the year and can be sold in the following places• Building construction sites• Households• Road constructions

Opportunities• Provide quality sand and stones• Supplying contracts with construction companies

Challenges• Competition• Labour demanding• Low earnings• Needs a lot of storage space• Transportation may be diffi cult

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 60,000Materials (Packaging sacks) 30,000Transport 50,000Rent (land) 30,000Total Amount 170,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials (Packaging sacks) 30,000Transport 50,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 120,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

STONE AND SAND EXCAVATIONSTONE AND SAND EXCAVATION

Information / Training Provider• Construction companies• Stones and sand excavators• Vocational training institutions

Page 90: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own90

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about making tiles and ventilators from clay or other materials. The clay is collected, prepared and pressed in moulds to form the desired shapes. The shapes are dried and burnt to harden. The tiles are used in rows for covering roofs and/or walls of buildings.

MaterialsThe clay is usually obtained from swamp areas.

Work placeFor this business a fl oor space of about 10x10 paces is needed for store and sales areas. Tiles can be made in an open area. For the production a reliable water source is required.

EquipmentA construction company can fabricate a kiln as well as the moulds. The other equipment can be found in hardware shops. The equipment may include:• Buckets • Containers• Kiln • Moulds• Plastic foil • Shovel• Sieve

PersonnelIdeally four people can run this business whereas all are engaged in production and sales and at least one should have the knowledge of tile making.

MarketThe market is throughout the year and mainly in urban set-tings. Tiles can be sold in the following places• Construction companies• Construction sites• Factories• Households

Opportunities• Supplying contracts for construction sites• Provision of quality tiles• Provision of unique tiles• Special orders

Challenges• Competition• Limited access to high quality clay• Limited market in rural settings• Damage due to poor storage• Damage due to poor transportation• Requires skills and experience

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000Materials 50,000Rent 50,000Utility (fi re wood, water) 40,000Total Amount 240,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Materials 50,000Rent 50,000Utility (fi re wood, water) 40,000Total Amount 160,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

TILE MAKINGTILE MAKING

Information / Training Provider

• Art and design schools• Ceramics institutions• Clay industries, Kajansi• Uganda industrial Research Institute

Page 91: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

91Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves making toys out of cloth materials, banana fi bres, boxes, wire and wood. Rubber can be used to make wheels for toys like cars and trains. Needles and thread are used to sew cloth toys. Nails are used to join wood and glue for the boxes. Play materials include toys and dolls.

MaterialsCloth, threads, needles etc. can be found at tailoring shops and markets; banana fi bbers from banana plantations, boxes form shops and markets and rubber wheels from old slippers.

Work placeFor this enterprise a space of about of about 3x3 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe equipment is available in hardware shops and super-markets and may include:• Cutting knives • Hammer• Nails • Pliers• Sewing needle • Threads• Pair of scissors

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business. They should be skilled in woodwork and arts. Good communication skills is an advantage when it comes to selling the toys.

MarketThe market for play materials mainly comprises of children, however it is the adults who actually purchase the toys. Toys can be sold in the following places• Households• Market places• Kindergartens• Schools

Opportunities• Contract for supplying nursery schools• Establish a good reputation to increase market• Provide quality toys• Provide unique toys

Challenges• Failure to pay for orders• Limited market• Limited market in rural settings

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 30,000Materials 50,000Transport 10,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 120,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 50,000Transport 10,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 100,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

TOY MAKINGTOY MAKING

Information / Training Provider• Art schools• Established toy makers• Toy factories• Vocational training institutions

Page 92: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own92

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves a group of people, who use African musical instruments and dance to entertain people for commercial purposes. They are hired on different occasions to entertain the gathering. The group plays songs and performs dances from different cultural backgrounds.

Work placeThe group requires a store of about 3x3 paces, whereas the practice takes place outdoors.

EquipmentTraditional music instruments are made by certain manu-facturers and are sold at tourist places or cultural centres. The equipment may include:• Drums• Extension cable• Guitar• Loudspeakers• Microphone• Traditional outfi ts for dancers

PersonnelIdeally four people can run this business and they should be good singers and dancers. They should also possess good communication skills.

MarketThe market is in urban and rural settings throughout the year and may include:• Ceremonies• Public occasions• Traditional functions• Weddings

Opportunities• Ceremonies• Expand the business to theatre plays• Public occasions• Unique performance

Challenges• Limited market in rural settings• Failure of payments

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 230,000Transport 50,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 310,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Description Amount Ush.Repair and maintenance of equipment 30,000Transport 50,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 110,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

TRADITIONAL DANCE GROUPTRADITIONAL DANCE GROUP

Information / Training Provider

• Dance and Art schools• Established dance groups• Music instructors• Tourist information board

Page 93: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

93Start Your OwnMANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about the manufacturing traditional instruments such as drums, xylophones, harps, and fi nger xylophones for sale. The commonly used materials are timber, hide, skin, strings etc, which are dried and cut in particular pattern to turn into an instrument.

MaterialsThe materials can be found in forests and swamps.

Work placeThe required fl oor space for this business is of about 3x3 paces, which can be divided into production-, storage- and sales-room. However, this business can also be done in an open area with just a small room for storage.

EquipmentThe carpentry tools are available at hardware shops.

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and should have the knowledge of making traditional music instruments and have a good ear for music.

MarketThe market comprises of entertainers and wholesalers. Traditional music instruments can be sold at the following places• Curio shops• Craft shops• Households• Street vending• Tourist places

Opportunities• Manufacture unique instruments• Manufacture quality instruments• Supplying contract with curio shops

Challenges• Ability to recognize sounds• Limited market in rural settings

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 50,000Materials 100,000Rent 30,000Transport 20,000Total Amount 200,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Materials 100,000Rent 30,000Transport 20,000Total Amount 170,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Established manufacturers of traditional music instruments• Music centres• Music training institutes

MUSIC INSTRUMENT MANUFACTURERTRADITIONAL MUSIC INSTRUMENT MANUFACTURER

Page 94: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING

No

tes

W H A T Y O U N E E D

Start Your Own94

INTRODUCTIONWooden wheel-barrows are used to carry luggage and other loads. Wheel-barrow making involves designing, cutting timber, and assembling the parts by using nails. The wheels are made out of wood, second hand bearings or even old tire rims. Wooden wheel-barrows are still cheaper than the imported metallic wheel-barrows.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000Materials (Timber) 100,000Transport 10,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 230,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials (Timber) 100,000Transport 10,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 140,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

WOODEN WHEEL-BARROW FABRICATIONWOODEN WHEEL-BARROW FABRICATION

Information / Training Provider

• Technical institutes• Established wooden wheel-barrow makers• Carpentry workshops• Vocational training institutions

MaterialsTimber or other kind of wood can be purchased from wood dealers, carpentry workshops, whereas nails are available at hardware shops.

Work placeFor this enterprise a store of about 2x2 paces is required. The fabrication can be done under a shade.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be bought from hardware shops and they may include:• Hacksaw blade• Hammer• Hand saw• Pair of pliers• Planner• Racket press• Screw driver• Table vice• Tape measure

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and they should have knowledge of woodwork.

MarketThe market is mostly in rural areas and busy places. Wooden wheel-barrows can be sold in the following places:• Market places and Trading centres• Farms• Bus and Taxi parks• Factories, Plantations

Opportunities• Provide quality and strong wheel-barrows• Provide a variety of wheel-barrows• Rent out in market places

Challenges• Limited market• Competition from metallic wheel-barrows• Requirement of storage space for materials• Expensive timber

Page 95: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

Business IdeasAir Time Sales Outlet 96Bar Service 97Barber Shop 98Basic Health Service 99Beauty Shop 100Bicycle Repair Service 101Boda Boda Bicycle Transport 102Book Shop 103Bread Shop 104Brick Laying 105Broker (Real Estate Agent) 106Butchery 107Carpets And Sofa Cleaning 108Car Wash Service 109Cassette Sales Shop 110Cereals And Pulses Trading 111Clothes Shop 112Collecting & Selling Firewood 113Collecting & Selling Used Newspaper 114Crafts Shop 115Draftsman Service 116Drums / Container Sales Shop 117Egg Shop 118Electrical Service 119Florists 120Food Vending 121

Fruit Salad Shop 122Fumigation Services 123Garbage Service 124Garden Service 125General Store 126Grocery Shop 127Hairdressers’ Salon 128Housekeeping Service 129Ice Cream Shop 130Information Agent 131Ironing Service 132Kerosene Trading 133Landscape Planning And Design 134Laundering And Cleaning Of Textiles 135Locksmith 136Manicure Service 137Milk Shop 138Mobile Lighting 139Mobile Music Service 140Mobile Phone Repair Service 141Mobile Trading 142Motorbike (Boda Boda) Service Station 143Mowing Service 144Newspaper Selling 145Nursery School 146Painting Service 147

Panel Beating And Spray Painting 148Pet Clinic 149Pizza Bakery 150Plumbing Service 151Public Lavatory 152Restaurant Service 153Rock Salt Selling 154Sales Promotion 155Saucepan Repair Service 156Security Service 157Seedlings Trading 158Shoe Mending 159Shoeshine Service 160Sign Making 161Stationary Shop 162Sugar Cane Selling 163Tailoring School 164Tailoring Service 165Tea Service 166Telephone Service 167Traditional Dance Group 168Tree Planting 169Video Theatre 170Watch Maintenance and Repair Service 171Water Supply Service 172

SERVICE

Page 96: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own96

INTRODUCTIONService fee and air time cards, which are used by telephone and mobile phone users, are bought from phone provider outlet stores or agents and are sold on to users with a profi t.

Work placeFor this business a room of about 2x2 paces is needed.

EquipmentA table or, even better, a counter is required for this business. This can be made and installed by a carpentry workshop.

PersonnelIdeally, one person can run this business. He or she should know how to read and write.

MarketThe business has a higher demand in urban areas and trading centres. The customers are telephone and mobile phone users and can be found in places like:• Bus station• Colleges• Fuel stations• Hotels• Restaurants• Taxi parks• Trading centres• Universities• Working places

Opportunities• Open sales points in different locations• Public holidays• Religious holidays

Challenges• Competition from other airtime sellers• Low sales in rural places

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000Materials (air time cards) 300,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 420,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Materials (air time cards) 300,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 340,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

AIR TIME SALES OUTLETAIR TIME SALES OUTLET

Information / Training Provider

• Art and design schools• Ceramics institutions• Clay industries, Kajansi• Uganda industrial Research Institute

Page 97: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

97Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONA bar is a place where drinks such as beers, sodas, spirits and local drinks are offered for sale. Brewing companies or whole-sale depots sell these drinks in large quantities, whereas bars offer them only for immediate consumption in small quantities.

MaterialsThe bottled or packed drinks are provided by breweries, factories and wholesale shops.

Work placeFor a bar, a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed, which should be divided into a sales room where drinks are served, and a store. The rooms should have electricity so that the drinks can be chilled in a refrigerator.

EquipmentA working table and refrigerator are the essential equip-ment. The former can be made in a carpentry workshop and the latter could even be bought second hand from electronic shops. • Chairs, Tables• Glasses• Refrigerator• Shelves

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run this business, one as the team leader and the other to be the bartender. One should know how to run a bar.

MarketThe market for this business is throughout the year but it‘s peak is during public holidays and festive seasons• Trading centers

Opportunities• Better service for better reputation• Festive seasons• Public occasions, holidays

Challenges• Damage caused by drunken, violent customers• Failure to pay for drinks once consumed• Peak hours during evening and night time

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the bar 300,000Materials 100,000Utilities (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 450,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 30,000Materials 100,000Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 180,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

BAR SERVICEBAR SERVICE

Success StoryAs told by Alice of Kisementi, Entebbe.“From the savings of my late husband I could open a bar in 1995. By this time all my fi ve sons were going to school. I started quite small by just selling beers and sodas. During public holidays, such as Christmas, I could earn more than usual. All my savings came out of these days‘ surplus. With the saved money I could expand my bar by using a tent as shade for my guests. Further, I bought chairs, tables and even employed two boys as waiters. Now I am selling drinks such as wine and different kinds of spirits. My business is going so well that I was in the position to construct my own small house. All my boys got a proper education and some are abroad now.”

Information / Training Provider• Breweries• Established businesses • Wholesalers • Sales agents

Page 98: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own98

INTRODUCTIONA barbershop is a place where men’s hair is cut, and sometimes beards shaved, according to the customers’ wishes, as a paid service. The commonly used tools are a shaver, razor blades and a pair of scissors.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the barber shop business 150,000Materials 20,000Utility (Electricity) 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 220,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 10,000Utility (Electricity) 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 70,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

BARBERSHOPBARBERSHOP

MaterialsMaterials for barbershops can be found in cosmetic shops and supermarkets.

Work placeFor a barbershop a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed. The building should have an electricity supply. However, in rural areas a barber can provide the service even in the shade of a tree.

EquipmentThe equipment is available in cosmetic shops and super-markets. It will include:• Brush• Combs• Mirror• Pair of scissors• Razor blade• Shaver• Smoother

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run this business, at least one being familiar with the barbers’ trade. They should always use clean tools.

MarketThere is a market in both urban and rural places, throughout the year. It includes all people who need their hair cut.

Opportunities• Better service better reputation• Festive seasons

Challenges• Skin cuts, due to poor handling of tools• Limited market• Continuous improvement of skills

Success StoryCopied from the newspaper ‚The New Vision‘ „The mid 1980s Mr. Mugisha started hair cutting under a tree by just using a simple shaver. Today he is the proud owner of Mugisha barbershop, which is located in the workers house in Kampala. Seven people are working now for him by using electric power shavers. His clientele range from ordinary people to members of parliament and high- ranking people. His income is so good, that he has no problem to cater for the high rent.“

Information / Training Provider

• Beauty colleges• Established barbershops

Page 99: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

99Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis service is about making available drugs, which are necessary for the treatment of the most common diseases in a given community such as malaria, colds, fever, minor burns, etc.

Work placeFor this service a floor space of about 4x4 paces is required.

EquipmentMost of the equipment can be found at drug- and pharma-ceutical stores. The bed and counter can be made by a carpentry workshop. The equipment may include: • Bed & Mattress• Counter• Needles• Steriliser• Thermometer

PersonnelA doctor and a trained attendant can run this service. The doctor should have at least a certifi cate in medicine and one person should have the basic knowledge about the availability of drugs and their costs.

MarketThe market in urban and rural places is throughout the year.

Opportunities• Better services, more satisfi ed customers• Improve health conditions of the community• Expand service to family planning• Offer service to NGOs and CBOs• Increasing market demand for good healthcare

Challenges• Requirements of skills• Requirements of care• Failure of payments• Competition• Offi cial and good qualifi cation

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the basic health service business 200,000Materials 300,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 540,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of store 30,000Materials 300,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 370,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

BASIC HEALTH SERVICE BASIC HEALTH SERVICE

Information / Training Provider• Drug shops• Established clinics• Medicine schools• Pharmaceutical stores

Page 100: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own100

BEAUTY SHOPINTRODUCTIONThe beauty shop business is about buying products such as skin lotions, hair oils, shampoos, bathing detergents, creams and other cosmetic products in bigger quantities and selling these items in smaller quantities with a small margin.

BEAUTY SHOP

MaterialsThe materials are available from wholesale cosmetic shops, beauty shops and general wholesalers.

Work placeFor a small enterprise, a room with a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed. This business can also be done travelling from place to place.

EquipmentA counter and shelves for display can be made and installed by a carpentry workshop.

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business and should be able to identify the different kind of cosmetics which will suit the client.

MarketThe market for beauty products is in rural and urban areas throughout the year. Beauty products can be sold in the following places• Households• Market places• Salons• Trading centers• Working places

Opportunities• Contracts with supplying salons• Offer of variety of cosmetics• Special clients (long term, loyal clients)

Challenges• Limited market• Price competition • Product expiration due to long storage• Skill to acquire and keep long term customers

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 50,000 Materials 100,000 Transport 20,000 Rent 20,000 Total Amount 190,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000 Materials 100,000 Transport 20,000 Rent 20,000 Total Amount 145,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Maggie of Alysha beauty shop“After training in one of the salons in Avema for about two years I worked in a salon where I was paid on commission, which means I did not get a salary, but a share of the income from the products I sold. I tried very hard and I encouraged my friends to buy from the shop I was working in. Through my hard work, I gained skills, experience and a good reputation so that I was able to save some money. From these savings, I was able to open my own shop named Alysha beauty shop. Mostly my shop sells skin lotions, creams, hair oils and chemicals. My main customers are ladies and the salons around my shop. I expanded my business with shampoos and hair products, which provided a higher income. I am still working in the salon and my sister is working in the beauty shop. All these earning have enabled me to cater for my sister and me. It is a good business especially when you have loyal customers”.

Information / Training Provider• Beauty institutes• Beauty salons, Fashion schools• Manufacturers of beauty products

Page 101: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

101Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONBicycle repair and maintenance includes correcting faulty parts or even fi xing new parts on a bicycle. The damaged parts may be wheels, tires, brakes, sprockets etc. The repairs may include soldering parts of a bicycle. Bicycles are commonly used as boda boda transport or privately.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the bicycle repair service (tool box) 130,000 Rent (Veranda) 30,000Utility (Water) 2,000Total Amount 162,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Rent (Veranda) 30,000Utility (Water) 2,000Total Amount 37,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

BICYCLE REPAIR SERVICEBICYCLE REPAIR SERVICE

MaterialsAccessories and spare parts can be bought from bicycle shops.

Work placeFor the enterprise a fl oor space of about 6x6 paces is needed. Bicycle repair and maintenance can be done under a tree, a veranda or even under a constructed shelter.

EquipmentThe equipment can be bought from hardware- and bicycle spare parts shops. The equipment may include:• Cutter • Greasing gun• Hammer • Hand pump• Pliers • Soldering gun• Spanner • Super glue

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business with the knowledge / ability to maintain bicycles.

MarketThe market is widely spread in busy areas like trading centres and may include:• Boda Boda riders• Private bicycle owners• Trading centres• Village market places

Opportunities• Provide quality service• Obtain orders from different organisations for assembling in large quantities• Combine with motorbike repair service

Challenges• Business opportunity is in small volumes• Bicycle spare parts may not be affordable in rural places• Maintain the standard of service

Success StoryAs told by Mr. Donga P. of Ipito Gweno, Lira.“In 1995 I started repairing bicycles on a veranda in Lira town. All that I had was a hammer, a spanner and a pair of pliers. My real break through came in 1998 when I was contracted by an Asian businessman in town to assemble his bicycles for sale. The money I got out of this contract, I used for buying a few bicycle spare parts, which I took to the markets in rural areas. After fi nishing this contract, I had worked for three years. The savings I used for supplementing my capital. Today I am the proud owner of a shop, which sells spare parts for bicycles and furthermore I employ people for assembling bicycles for sale.”

Information / Training Provider• Vocational training institute• Bicycle repair shops

Page 102: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own102

BODA BODA BICYCLE TRANSPORTINTRODUCTIONBoda boda transport is a mode of transportation whereby bicycles are used for the service. Bicycle-riders transport pas-sengers and goods from one place to another against payment. They are normally found at particular locations (boda boda stands). In some areas, boda boda operators need a license.

BODA BODA BICYCLE TRANSPORT

Work placeThe work place for riders concentrates in trading centres, busy junctions of major and feeder roads.

EquipmentBicycles can be bought from bicycle dealers or individuals interested in selling their bicycles; toolboxes are bought from bicycle shops. The equipment may include: • Bicycle• Toolbox

PersonnelOnly one person is required to run this business and should know how to ride a bicycle.

MarketBoda boda provides transport for people and goods that need to move quickly from one place to another or in areas where there is no regular transport. These include working and market places, schools, households, bus stations and taxi parks.

Opportunities• Market days• Market places• Public occasions• Service for school children• Sporting events

Challenges• Frequent breakdowns due to bad roads• Competition• Exposure to extreme weather conditions• Long working hours• Unstable income• Expensive spare parts

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for the boda boda bicycle transport 100,000License 20,000Total Amount 120,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of the bicycle 10,000License fee 1,000Grease 2,000Total Amount 13,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Sematimba of Bweyogerere station“I went to school in Gombe Secondary School up to senior two. I had to drop out of school due to lack of school fees. One reason was that I lost my father who was the only breadwinner in my family. I tried to get my uncles to pay my fees but all promises were in vain. My mother, a housewife, advised me to use our bicycle for transport purposes for making money. Every morn-ing I woke up at 6.00am and drove along the road to catch customers. For a couple of years I was in this business. With my earning of 4,000 – 6,000 Shillings every day I could buy some food. Furthermore, I made some profi t and secured a second hand motorbike from a friend, which I managed to pay for in instalments. When UPE (Universal Primary Education) started, I sent my young brothers to school and additionally I bought them school uniforms and books. Moreover I opened a small stall for my mother where she sells cooked foodstuff.”

Information / Training Provider• Boda boda Associations provide basic information and training to aspiring members.

Page 103: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

103Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONEstablishing a bookshop involves buying different kinds of educational materials such as text books, novels, papers, literature books, religious books, etc. in large quantities and offering them for sale in small quantities.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the bookshop 150,000Materials 300,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 480,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials 300,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 335,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

BOOKSHOPBOOKSHOP

MaterialsBooks are bought from large bookshops, publishers and wholesale shops, which are found in large towns.

Work placeFor a small bookshop a fl oor-space of about 3x3 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe equipment, mainly furniture, is locally made by car-penters.• Working table, shelves• Counter• Display stands

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business. He should know how to read and write.

MarketThe market for this business is bigger in urban places. Books can be sold to:• Companies• Other literature readers• Schools• Working places

Opportunities• Better service, more loyal customers• Expansion to various materials and all kinds of books• Imperishable goods / books• Long-term contracts with schools• Long-term customers• Sales of second hand books

Challenges• Changes in school syllabus • Limited market• Lack of space for storage• Competition

Success StoryAs told by Jennifer of Book Point Nabisunsa, Kampala.„In 1993 I started a very small bookshop just at Nabisunsa shopping centre. I mainly sold simple textbooks and other small school materials such as mathematical sets, rulers etc. At that time, many schools were coming up in this area so I was able to expand my bookshop. Now I am selling textbooks for primary and secondary schools. Since it is the only book-shop in this area, the sales are good during school days. I can afford to pay my rent both for the shop and my house.”

Information / Training Provider• Learning Institutions • Libraries• Established book shops

Page 104: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own104

BREAD SHOPINTRODUCTIONThis business involves buying bread from different bakeries in large quantities at wholesale prices and selling them with a profi t margin per piece. The products normally include bread, buns and rolls.

BREAD SHOP

Work placeFor this business, a sales room of about 2x2 paces is needed. However, the business can also be situated on verandas.

EquipmentThe table and shelves can be made and installed by carpen-try workshops. Bags for packaging can be found in shops and markets. The required equipment may include:• Packing bags• Shelves for display• Working table

PersonnelIdeally, two people, a cashier and an attendant, can run this business suffi ciently and they should be able to keep the sales place clean.

MarketBread products are sold throughout the year and can be traded in the following areas:• Cafes• Hotels• Households• Market places• Restaurants• Schools• Working places

Opportunities• Quality bread products, better reputation• Supplying contracts with restaurants / shops• Expansion of business to a bakery

Challenges• Competition with other shops• Hygiene standards• Limited market in rural places• Easy decay of goods due to poor and long storage

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for the bread shop business 100,000Materials (bread products, bags, etc) 130,000Transport 20,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 270,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials (bread products, bags, etc) 130,000Transport 5,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 160,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Bakers• Catering institutes• Established bread sellers

Page 105: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

105Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about laying bricks, pre-cutting stones, concrete blocks and other types of building blocks in mortar for con-structing and repairing facades and solid walls, foundations, partitions, arches and other structures. The layers of mortar serve as the base and binder for blocks. Further shaping bricks to fi t irregular spaces and constructing arches and ornamental brick-work. It may be constructions of new buildings or modifi cations or maintenance of older properties.

MaterialsMaterials for this business can be bought from brick makers, sand and stone excavators and hardware shops.

Work placeThe work place is provided by the clients, but a room of about 2x2 paces is usually needed as a store room.

EquipmentAll the required equipment is available in hardware shops and may include:• Building line• Building square• Club hammer• Measuring tape• Pan• Pit axe• Plumb rule• Rough casting• Spade• Spirit level• Steel fl at• Trowel

PersonnelIdeally four people can run this business, at least one person should possess bricklaying skills.

MarketThe market in urban and rural areas is throughout the year. Bricklaying can be done for individuals and for construction companies.

Opportunities• Obtain contracts with bigger construction companies• Provide quality work• Work according to time schedule

Challenges• Failure of clients to pay in time• Extreme weather conditions• Lack of all necessary tools

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for brick laying business 200,000 Rent 20,000 Total Amount 220,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 30,000 Rent 20,000 Total Amount 50,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Technical institutes• Technical schools• Construction companies• Constructors

BRICK LAYINGBRICK LAYING

Page 106: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own106

INTRODUCTIONThe broker business is about arranging the lease or the sales of properties, such as shops, houses and plots, or assisting buyers to fi nd suitable properties. Certain fees are paid for the service when the buyers or tenants fi nd a suitable place for their needs.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the broker business (a mobile phone) 110,000Transport 50,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 180,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Utility (air time) 30,000Transport 20,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 75,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

BROKER (REAL ESTATE AGENT)BROKER (REAL ESTATE AGENT)

Work placeFor this business a fl oor space of about 2x2 paces is needed for establishing an offi ce. However, this service can also be done at a simple stand.

EquipmentThe working table can be manufactured by a carpentry work-shop. A phone is required for communication purposes.

PersonnelIdeally, one person can run this business and should have good communication skills and knowledge of the property market.

MarketThe market is throughout the year and mostly in urban areas. • Expatriates• Households• Investors

Opportunities• Expansion of business to cars, jobs etc.• Main broker for Non Government Organisations, Community Based Organisations

Challenges• Labour demanding• Non-payment by clients

Success StoryAs told by Jimmy of Kwanta Mpola Brokers at Kireka trading centre.“I started my broker business just at a stand at the Kireka trad-ing centre. I mainly dealt in houses. At that time, we were only two people who offered this kind of service. I got contracts from many landlords and my charges were 3,000 Shillings for the search fee and 7,000 for the fi nd fee. With my earnings, I could build a wooden stall and further expanded my business to the area ‚plots‘. This increased my earnings, and now I am charg-ing 5,000 Shillings for the search fee and 15,000 shillings for the fi nd fee for houses, and 20,000 Shillings for search fee and 50,000 Shillings for the fi nd fee for plots. With this commission I have been able to open up a grocery shop for my wife and pay my house rent.”

Information / Training Provider

• Established brokers• Business schools

Page 107: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

107Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about buying meat from slaughterhouses in larger quantities for a wholesale price and selling it on with a profi t margin. The meat may include beef, goat, poultry, mutton, and pork.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for butchery 100,000Materials 250,000Transport 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 400,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 250,000Transport 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 310,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

BUTCHERYBUTCHERY

MaterialsFresh beef, goat, pork and mutton are available in slaugh-terhouses in urban places. In rural areas one may slaughter his own animals after getting the approval of a veterinary assistant.

Work placeFor this enterprise, a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed, which should be divided into a store and a salesroom.

EquipmentThe cutting log and the working table can be made by a carpentry workshop and the other equipment can be found in local shops. The equipment may include:• Axe • Cutting knife• Cutting log • Panga• Weighing scale • Working table

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run this business. They must be able to keep the sales place clean and they should have a knowl-edge of meat, hygiene standards and related activities.

MarketThe market is available throughout the year and higher demand arises during festive seasons. The products can be sold at the following places:• Bars• Cafes• Hotels• Households • Restaurants

Opportunities• Sales of quality meat• Supply contracts with hotels, • Grocery stores• Public or family functions

Challenges• Hygiene standards• Poor or long storage will lead to decay of the meat• Limited market

Success StoryAs told by Oula Stephen”It was three years ago that I started my business here in Banda after noticing that there was a demand for meat sup-ply. At that time, there was only one butcher in Banda, who I believe was not smart enough to run the business properly. I began by buying a thigh of a cow, cutting and selling it in smaller pieces. Today I buy whole slaughtered cows. My busi-ness is growing every day. On a good day I make quite a lot of money, depending on the size of the cow . I could expand my business to boda boda bike transporting on this route.”

Information / Training Provider• Catering institutions• Established butcheries • Slaughterhouses

Page 108: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own108

INTRODUCTIONCar wash service is offered at a washing bay. It involves cleaning the outside and / or inside of cars, trucks, buses etc. The vehicles are washed using a cloth or sponge and soap. The commonly used method is washing by hand.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the wash bay business 100,000 Materials 30,000Rent 50,000Utility (Water) 20,000Total Amount 200,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 30,000Rent 50,000Utility (Water) 20,000Total Amount 110,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

CAR WASH SERVICECAR WASH SERVICE

Success StoryAs told by Lubega Michael of Kitugulu Lake Side Entebbe.“I woke up at 6.00am each day and headed for the shores of Lake Victoria at a place called Kitugulu just near my home area. I worked with two other boys. We washed about fi ve cars everyday. The service fee for small cars washed was 2,000 Shs and for bigger vehicles 4,000 Shs each. Our business expanded when a beach, called Ssese Gate Way, opened which is just along the roadside near the washing bay. We are now washing 10-15 cars per day. I am now able to meet my daily needs comfortably and even pay taxes as I am required to pay.”

Information / Training Provider

• Established reputable washing bays

MaterialsThe materials like detergents etc. can be bought from shops and markets.

Work placeCar wash service is usually done on open ground. A patch of land of about 10x10 paces is recommended which should have a reliable water supply.

EquipmentThe equipment is available in shops and markets and includes:• Washing cloth / sponge• Basins • Jerry cans• Buckets• Water drums• Brush

PersonnelIdeally, three people with the knowledge of car washing can run the business.• Leader – one • Car washers – two

Market• All vehicle owners

Opportunities• Better service, better reputation• Car-washing contracts for companies, organisations

Challenges• Carefulness• Labour demanding• Limited markets in rural places• Quality consistency• Risks of handling people’s vehicles

Page 109: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

109Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves cleaning carpets and sofa seats. Carpets and sofas are cleaned by using an appropriate kind of wash-ing detergent and a cloth or sponge. This can be done at one’s residence or the goods may be carried to the place, where the services take place.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the business 50,000Materials 100,000Rent 60,000Utilities (Water) 20,000Total Amount 230,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Equipment replacement 10,000Materials 50,000Rent 60,000Utility (Water) 20,000Total Amount 140,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

CARPET AND SOFA CLEANING CARPET AND SOFA CLEANING

MaterialsThe materials can be found in supermarkets and grocery stores.

Work placeFor this enterprise a storage space of about 6x6 paces is required. The cleaning itself can be done in an open space. The business can also be carried out by offering services in clients’ own residences.

EquipmentThe equipment is available in supermarkets and may include: • Cleaning brush• Cleaning detergents• Dryer• Mop• Sponge

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run this business. The personnel must be able to clean properly in order to keep the loyalty of the customers.

MarketThe market can be targeted at people or organisations that require expensive furniture, including: • Hotels• Households• Restaurants• Working places

Opportunities• Better reputation, bigger market• Consistency of service quality brings more customers• Contracts with offi ces, restaurants, hotels

Challenges• Labour demanding• Limited market in rural places• Mistrust by clients• Quality consistency• Good training when handling people’s goods

Information / Training Provider• Established carpet and sofa cleaners

Page 110: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own110

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about buying cassettes from recording studios or companies in big quantities and selling them to consumers at a certain added profi t margin.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000Materials 60,000Utilities (Electricity) 10,000Transport 20,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 210,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 60,000Utility (Electricity) 10,000Transport 20,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 120,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

CASSETTE SALES SHOPCASSETTE SALES SHOP

Information / Training Provider

• Recording studios / companies / publishers• Existing cassette sales shop

Work placeFor the sales room a fl oor space of about 2x2 paces is needed. However, this business can also be done by street vending.

EquipmentMost of the equipment can be found at electronics shops; shelves can be made and fi xed by carpentry workshops. • Cassette player• Bag for transporting the tapes• Shelves for display

PersonnelIdeally, one person can run this business. He or she should have interest in music.

MarketThe market is in urban and rural areas throughout the year, especially at locations where street vending is common.

Opportunities• Offer variety of tapes for more earnings• Expand the business to renting cassettes and video tapes

Challenges• Limited market• Small profi t margin• Competition

Page 111: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

111Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis involves buying cereals and pulses in larger quantities for a wholesale price from farmers, then selling these to different traders in the urban towns. It may also include buying, fumigating and storing the products, such as millet, sesame, ground-nuts, beans, coffee etc., in order to sell them during off-seasons.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000Materials 320,000Transport 50,000Rent 50,000Total Amount 520,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of store 30,000Materials 220,000Transport 50,000Rent 50,000Total Amount 350,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

CEREALS AND PULSES TRADINGCEREALS AND PULSES TRADING

Work placeFor this business a fl oor space of about 5x5 paces is needed, which is mainly used for storage purposes.

EquipmentThe equipment is available in shops and markets and may include:• Packing bags• Bicycle for transportation purposes

PersonnelIdeally, one person can run this business. Good negotiation skills are needed in order to maximise the earnings.

MarketThe market is available during off-seasons. Cereals and pulses may be sold at the following places• Local markets• Shops• Cereals and pulse processors• Traders from different towns

Opportunities• Provide quality cereals and pulses• Expand the business to processing• Export to other countries• Provide during off-seasons

Challenges• Storage needs a lot of space• Raw materials are seasonal• Poor and long storage may lead to decay• Market is limited in rural settings

Information / Training Provider• Agricultural training institutions• Established cereal and pulses Traders• Farmers’ associations• Farmers

Page 112: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own112

CLOTHES SHOPINTRODUCTIONA clothes shop is a place where clothes are sold to consumers. The clothes may be for women or men, teenagers or even infants. Moreover, the varieties can be second-hand, tailored or ready-made clothes. In addition, particular kinds of clothes can be sold, such as for special occasions, daily use or offi ce clothes. Clothes shops can also aim at particular groups of people such as working groups.

CLOTHES SHOP

MaterialsMaterials can be bought from the wholesale shops, markets or even from tailors.

Work placeFor this enterprise a fl oor space of about 5x5 paces is needed. It can be divided into a storage section and a sales section. However, this kind of business can also be done from market stalls or an open space.

EquipmentThe equipment is available in shops and markets. The hanger rail stands are locally made by carpenters. • Counter• Flat Iron • Hanger rail stands• Hangers• Pair of scissors• Tape measure

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run this business and they should be fashion conscious.

MarketThere is a wide range of markets for this business, depend-ing on the nature of the clothes and the target groups. Par-ticular opportunities are presented by changing fashions and special occasions like graduations, religious holidays, etc.

Opportunities• Campaign period• Festive days and seasons• Updated fashion• Selecting for customers• Special orders, e.g. uniforms for local football teams, schools• Village market days

Challenges• Competition from the sellers• Dust and dirt spoiling stock• Limited market in rural areas• Changing fashions

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for the business 50,000Materials 300,000Rent (open space) 25,000Transport 30,000Total Amount 405,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials 300,000Rent 25,000Transport 30,000Total Amount 360,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Tusubira Moses, a second hand clothes dealer in Kamwokya.“I used to work with ceramic Rak LTD in Kampala but resigned, because I wanted to run my own business. I received my ter-minal benefi ts, which I used for buying a bale of second-hand clothes at a cost of 200,000/-. Fortunately, Christmas was ap-proaching so I could do good business. From the profi ts from the initial bale, I could then buy three bales per week. My biggest sales come from outside markets, which we visit on particular days of the month, like the Kitoro Market in Entebbe.

Information / Training Provider• District trade offi ces• Established clothes shops• Tailoring and design schools

Page 113: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

113Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about collecting wood, cutting trees, then splitting these to preferred sizes and fi nally drying the wood. This is sold as fi rewood for cooking. The common method for cutting and splitting wood is using an axe or a panga. Wood can also be used to make charcoal.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 50,000Materials 50,000Transport 30,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 150,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials 50,000Transport 30,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 105,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

COLLECTING & SELLING FIREWOODCOLLECTING & SELLING FIREWOOD

MaterialsWood can be found in local forests, farms, cultivated areas and plantations.

Work placeFor this enterprise, an open space of about 4x4 paces is needed. This is mainly for cutting and splitting the wood, which is transported to marketplaces at a later stage.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be found in hardware shops or local markets and may include:• Axe• Hammer• Panga• Saw• Wheel-barrow

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run this business and should have knowledge and skills in cutting fi rewood and identifying quality trees.

MarketThere is a higher demand for this business in urban areas and trading centres, and it may include: • Bakeries• Brewing bars• Households• Market places• Restaurants

Opportunities• Contract for supplying, bakeries, brewers, etc.• Expand the business to charcoal making• Provide quality fi rewood

Challenges• Bureaucratic diffi culties in obtaining license• Diffi culties in transporting to markets• Discouraged by the forestry department• Short-term business due to deforestation

Information / Training Provider• Agricultural colleges • Agricultural schools• District forestry departments• Established fi rewood sellers

Page 114: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own114

COLLECTING AND SELLING USED NEWSPAPERSINTRODUCTIONThis business involves collecting old news-papers from households, offi ces and public places for a certain fee, or even free of charge, then selling them to paper recycling companies, or to anyone who needs them for other purposes.

COLLECTING AND SELLING USED NEWSPAPERS

MaterialsThe materials are found within households, offi ces and public places such as newspaper shops, schools and restaurants.

Work placeFor this enterprise, a dry storeroom of about 1x1 paces is needed.

EquipmentWooden boxes and palettes can be made at a carpentry workshop and all the other equipment is available at markets and shops. The equipment may include: • Wooden boxes

PersonnelOne person can run this business.

MarketThere is a higher demand for newspaper recycling in urban areas, where the recycling industries as well as shops are found.

Opportunities• Supply contracts with recycling companies• Supply contracts with shops• Supply contracts with tailoring schools• Expansion of business to collection of cement bags.

Challenges• Limited market in rural places• Small profi t margin• Damage due to wet or poor storage

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 20,000Materials (Papers) 50,000Transport 30,000Rent 10,000Total Amount 110,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of store 3,000Materials (Papers) 50,000Transport 30,000Rent 10,000Total Amount 93,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Recycling companies• Market vendors• Established businesses

Page 115: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

115Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves the buying of handicrafts from different craft makers and selling them to the public for a profi t. The crafts may include baskets, mats, wall hangings, pots, necklaces, earrings, toys etc.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the craft business 100,000Materials 300,000Transport 50,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 490,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Materials 200,000Transport 50,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 310,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

CRAFTS SHOPCRAFTS SHOP

MaterialsAll materials are bought from the craft makers.

Work placeFor the enterprise a room of about 4x4 paces is needed as a sales room.

EquipmentAll the required equipment is available in local shops and markets. It includes:• Hangers• Nails• Rails• Shelves

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and at least one person should have some knowledge about handicrafts.

MarketThe main market for crafts are tourists, although local people also buy these products. The markets include:• Cafes• Curio shops• Hotels• Households• Market places• Working places

Opportunities• Provide unique handicrafts• Participate in craft exhibitions, conferences and national functions• Sell to tourists

Challenges• Lack of appreciation from the locals• Limited market in rural places• Damage due to poor storage• Possible diffi culties in transportation

Information / Training Provider• Cultural centres• Established craft shops

Page 116: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own116

DRAFTSMAN SERVICEINTRODUCTIONThis business is about making plans and sketches of houses, buildings, compounds and machinery, or whatever is requested by the customers. In addition, the service involves measuring, estimating, calculating and costing the necessary materials. The draftsman service may include the supervision of a manufacturing process or a construction site.

DRAFTSMAN SERVICE

MaterialsThe materials can be found at stationary shops.

Work placeFor the office, a floor space of about 3x3 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe drawing table, stool and T-square can be made by a carpentry workshop. The other equipment is available at stationary shops. The equipment may include:• Sticking tape• Drawing set• Drawing table• Ink• Pencils• Rubber• Stool• T-squares

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run this business and should have knowledge of construction and technical drawing.

MarketThere is a high demand is in urban areas and even in rural areas. The service can be offered to the following customers:• Construction companies • Private individuals

Opportunities• Provide accurate and time-bound service• Drafting for large companies• Acquire consultation contracts

Challenges• Marketing the service may be diffi cult• Drawings may not be collected• Final payments may not be made

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for the draftsman service 250,000 Materials 60,000Transport 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 360,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Materials 60,000Transport 20,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 130,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Technical schools• Technical institutions• Established businesses

Page 117: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

117Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about selling plastic or metal containers, which are used for the collection and storage of water as well as agricultural products and processed beverages.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 50,000Materials (drums, detergents) 320,000Utilities (Water) 20,000Transport 50,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 470,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials (drums, detergent) 300,000Utilities (Water) 20,000Transport 50,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 405,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

DRUMS / CONTAINER SALES SHOPDRUMS / CONTAINER SALES SHOP

MaterialsDrums are available from fi rms and factories that import their raw materials in such containers, or from fuel suppliers.

Work placeFor this business an open space of about 6x6 paces is needed.

EquipmentEquipment is needed for washing and cleaning the con-tainers:• Brushes • Buckets• Foam • Rags• Sponges • Steel brushes

PersonnelIdeally, three people can run this business, and all should be involved in buying, cleaning, transporting, selling and distrib-uting the containers, according to demand. They should be able to identify the value and the quality of these items.

MarketThe market for the drums is throughout the year in both rural and urban areas. The clients may include:• Construction companies• Hotels• Households• Malwa brewers• Restaurants• Schools• Washing bays

Opportunities• Supply village market days• Supply washing bays• Expand business to wash containers

Challenges• Substantial storage space may be required• Cost of transport may be high• Market is limited in rural areas• Good cleaning demands intensive labour

Information / Training Provider• Established drum sales shops• Shipping companies• Fuel stations

Page 118: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own118

EGG SHOPINTRODUCTIONThis business is about buying eggs from poultry farms in large quantities, washing and sorting them and selling them in smaller quantities with a certain profi t margin. The eggs may be from local chickens or hybrids.

EGG SHOP

Work placeFor this enterprise, a sales room of about 3x3 paces is needed.

EquipmentOnly a working table and trays are required for this business. They can be found in certain shops and supermarkets.

PersonnelIdeally one person can run the business. He or she should be able to identify quality eggs and should have good communication skills. Eggs are quite delicate and require careful handling.

MarketEggs can be sold in urban and rural areas, on a retail or a wholesale basis. The customers may include:• Bakeries• Cafes• Hotels• Households• Restaurants• Shops

Opportunities• Supply contracts for hotels and shops• Provide quality and tasty eggs• Expand business to a poultry farm

Challenges• Competition• Damage if not handled well• Poor handling and storage may lead to loss• Long storage may lead to decay

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 50,000Materials (Eggs, Trays) 50,000Transport 30,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 160,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 2,000Materials (Eggs, Trays) 50,000Transport 50,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 132,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Poultry farms• Egg sellers and buyers• Commercial institutes

Page 119: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

119Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves assembling, installing, testing and maintaining electrical equipment, as well as wiring domestic and commercial buildings. Builders and households can use this service. The electric power supply may be from the grid or through solar power systems.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 300,000Transport 30,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 350,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Transport 30,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 60,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

ELECTRICAL SERVICEELECTRICAL SERVICE

MaterialsThe required materials can be purchased from electrical shops.

Work placeFor the enterprise, a store of about 2x2 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be bought from electrical shops and may include:• Electrical tool kit• Ladders• Tape measure• Small hand drill• Wire cutter

PersonnelIdeally, three people can run this business and at least one of them should have knowledge of electrical installations.

MarketThe market is mainly in urban areas. Electrical services can be provided to the following customers:• Construction companies• Factories and industries• Households • Public places

Opportunities• Obtain service contracts with construction companies• Provide quality service

Challenges• Diffi culties in maintaining service standard• Failure of payments• Failure to meet deadlines• Requirement of skills and experience• Limited market in rural settings

Information / Training Provider• Technical institution• Uganda Electricity Board• Construction companies

Page 120: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own120

FLORISTSINTRODUCTIONThis business is about preparing and selling fl owers and fl oral arrangements according to clients’ requests. It includes plan-ning and designing fl oral arrangements, arranging supply and storage of fl owers, decorations and other items and fi nally organising the delivery of completed arrangements. The fl owers may be artifi cial or natural.

FLORISTS

MaterialsFlowers can be bought from fl ower farmers.

Work placeFor the enterprise, a room of about 4x4 paces is needed for arranging and storing.

EquipmentMost of the equipment is available in shops, markets and supermarkets and may include:• Flower pots• Pair of scissors• Pair of tongs• Small plate• Sponges• Water buckets• Watering can

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run this business. They should know about handling and arranging fl owers for particular functions.

MarketFlower arrangements are mainly bought for special occa-sions. The market comprises:• Churches• Hotels• Households• Reception halls• Restaurants

Opportunities• Ceremonies such as birthdays, weddings, burials, graduations, valentine day etc.• Long-term supplying contracts with hotels, restaurants and companies

Challenges• Limited market• Decay due to long or improper storage • Orders may not be collected

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for the business 100,000Materials 200,000Utilities (Water) 10,000Transport 20,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 370,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials 240,000Utilities (Water) 10,000Transport 20,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 315,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Design institutions• Established fl orists• School of arts

Page 121: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

121Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves preparing different kinds of foodstuffs for sale. The food is prepared and served to people at their workplaces. The foods are locally cooked and they may include matoke, groundnut sauce, beef stew, potatoes, rice, beans, cassava, peas etc. The most commonly used method for cooking is on a charcoal or fi rewood stove.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the food cooking business 160,000Materials 40,000Rent 30,000Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 15,000Transport 20,000Total Amount 265,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 150,000Rent 30,000Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 15,000Transport 20,000Total Amount 225,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

FOOD VENDINGFOOD VENDING

MaterialsThe raw materials for this business can be bought from markets and shops. If you have your own garden, you can also grow vegetables.

Work placeFor this enterprise, a shelter of 3x3 paces is needed. This should be divided into an area for cooking and one for eating. A clean water supply should also be available.

EquipmentThe equipment for food vending can be found at local shops and markets. The furniture is locally made by carpenters.• Benches• Charcoal stoves• Ladle• Medium-sized working table• Saucepans• Utensils (plates, cups, spoons, knives etc.) • Washbasins

PersonnelIdeally, three people can run this business, at least one person who knows how to cook, and the others as as-sistants.

MarketThe market for this business are people who are not able to prepare their own food. These are found at workplaces and markets, building sites, bus and taxi parks and at public events. You can also fi nd customers by street vending.

Opportunities• Provide quality, nutritious food• Expand market on public occasions, outside catering

Challenges• Competition may be high• Market in rural settings may be limited• Poor storage may lead to decay and losses• Storage of equipment may be diffi cult• Transportation may be diffi cult

Success StoryAs told by Nalongo from Owino market“I started selling cooked food in Owino market in 1995. I cooked the food at home because I was not able to acquire a stall at the market because of the taxes. I sold food for almost one year. Later I acquired a wooden stall here in the market where my business is now based. I can now pay the required taxes. In Owino, I am very famous for the quality of food which I offer. I supply almost the whole market with food every day at lunchtime. With my earnings and with the help of my husband, I am able to feed my family, dress them and send them to school. I take advantage of public occasions and make a lot of profi t.”

Information / Training Provider• Catering institutes• Established food vendors

Page 122: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own122

FRUIT SALAD SHOPINTRODUCTIONThis business involves a shop selling varieties of salads that are mainly produced from such fruits as mangoes, papaws, watermelons, pineapples, and sweet bananas. The fruits are bought in large quantities, washed, pealed and cut into pieces to make the fruit salad. Sugar can be added to give a sweeter taste.

FRUIT SALAD SHOP

MaterialsOne can get fresh fruits from the markets, directly from farmers or even from the family garden.

Work placeFor this business a clean room of about 3x3 paces, and a clean water source are needed.

EquipmentMost equipment can be found in shops. A second-hand refrigerator is normally available in electronic shops; a working table can be made in a carpentry workshop. The equipment may include:• Bowls • Cups• Knives • Plates• Refrigerator • Sieve• Spoons • Working table

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run this business. They should have knowledge of salad making and hygiene.

MarketThere is a high demand in densely populated areas and during dry seasons. The business can be done in the following places• Bus stations • Constructions sites• Street vending • Taxi parks• Trading centres

Opportunities• Increase sales during dry and / or hot days; public occasions / holidays• Provide varieties of fruits• Provide quality fruits• Supply fruits for functions• Supply nutritious value

Challenges• Diffi culties in keeping hygiene standards• Expensive equipment, e.g. refrigerators• Limited market in rural settings• Quick decay due to poor storage

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 350,000Materials 50,000Utility (Water, Electricity) 30,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 460,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 50,000Utilities (Water, Electricity) 30,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 120,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Catering institutes• Hotels and restaurants

Page 123: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

123Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about applying techniques for killing or controlling pests and weeds in domestic, commercial and industrial areas, at roadsides, and on private and public lands. It also involves the inspection of buildings and surrounding areas to detect signs of termites, rodents or other pests and weed infestation. Another part of this activity involves mixing the chemicals for pest and weed control and operating pumps to inject or spray pesticides or herbicides.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the fumigation service business 100,000Materials 200,000Transport 30,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 350,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Materials 200,000Transport 30,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 270,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

FUMIGATION SERVICESFUMIGATION SERVICES

MaterialsThe required material can be bought from vet clinics and shops.

Work placeFor this enterprise, a fl oor space of about 2x2 paces is needed for storage.

EquipmentThe equipment is available in agricultural shops and may include:• Buckets• Containers for measuring the chemicals and the solvents• Masks• Panga• Spoons• Spray pumps

PersonnelTwo people can run this business and should know about the chemicals involved, and how to apply them.

MarketThe market is throughout the year in urban areas. Fumiga-tion service can be offered in the following places• Cafes• Factories• Gardens• Hotels / Restaurants• Households• Offi ces• Schools

Opportunities• Contracts with factories, offi ces, schools• Better service, better reputation

Challenges• Poor availability of chemicals• Competition• Harmful chemicals• Limited market in rural areas• Skills required for using chemicals

Information / Training Provider• Agriculture extension offi cer• Agriculture research centres• Established businesses• Vet clinics

Page 124: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own124

GARBAGE SERVICEINTRODUCTIONThis business is about collecting rubbish from households, hotels, restaurants and other commercial and industrial establish-ments, then loading it into bins and fi nally unloading and disposing of it at the right dumping places. Wheelbarrows are used to ferry the bins. It is also possible to carry ready packed garbage bags without using a wheelbarrow.

GARBAGE SERVICE

Work placeGarbage is collected from private houses, hotels and restaurants, etc.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be found in hardware shops and may include:• Gloves• Plastic containers• Wheelbarrow

PersonnelIdeally, one person can run this business.

MarketGarbage can be collected from the following places• Households• Restaurants• Hotels• Schools• Public buildings

Opportunities• Obtain contracts to provide the service to restaurants, hotels, households, market places

Challenges• Limited market in rural areas• Labour intensive• Psychologically demanding• Competition

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 60,000Materials 2,000Total Amount 62,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 2,000Total Amount 12,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Mali Chandia of Entebbe town.“About fi ve years ago I started collecting garbage after drop-ping from school at primary seven. My father could not afford to pay for my secondary education. I decided to get into this business because I had nothing else to do and yet I had to cater for my daily needs. At fi rst it was diffi cult for me, because I was not psychologically prepared for it, but as the time went by, I got familiar with it and now it is just like any other busi-ness for me. Today I use a wheelbarrow and wear gloves to collect garbage. My earnings are enough to cater comfortably for my daily needs. My income is about 30,000 Shillings per week, each of my clients have to pay 200 shillings per trip of garbage I collect.”

Information / Training Provider• Established garbage collectors• Local authorities

Page 125: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

125Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONGarden service involves slashing, cultivating and planting a plot of land, and the trimming of fl owers or bushes at people’s homes, at schools and working places, etc. Service is charged at a certain fee according to the size of the plot or the work being done.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the business 30,000Transport 10,000Total Amount 40,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 3,000Transport 10,000Total Amount 13,000 *These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

GARDEN SERVICEGARDEN SERVICE

Work placeThis business is carried out at the clients’ premises.

EquipmentThe equipment needed can be bought from hardware shops and may include:• Boots• Hand hoe• Rake• Slasher

PersonnelOne person who knows about gardening can run this business.

MarketThe service can be offered to anybody who likes to have a properly maintained garden and is willing to pay for the service. The market may include:• Hospitals• Hotels• Households• Schools• Working places

Opportunities• Expand to entertainment centres• Offer services in various places for higher income• Provide better services for more reputation

Challenges• Labour demanding• Limited training opportunities

Success Story„I started cultivating land at the age of ten. I used to help my mother during holidays in our garden, where we planted crops for home consumption and for sale. It is where I got my pocket money. After my father passed away, while I was in my senior two, I could not continue with my education, since it was very expensive for my mother. I engaged myself in cultivating our own plot and other places against payment. I worked in several homes as a shamba boy until I found permanent employment in Bukoto. I trim the fences and dig the fl ower gardens of NSSF Estates. With this income I am able to help my younger sister and my mother.“

Information / Training Provider• Forestry college

Page 126: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own126

GENERAL STOREINTRODUCTIONThis business is about offering new and used goods to the general public for personal or household consumption. These materials may include many things from clothes and cosmetics to food and household appliances. The materials are bought in large quantities at wholesale prices and then sold in smaller quantities with a certain profi t margin.

GENERAL STORE

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 50,000Materials 300,000Transport 30,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 420,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 300,000Transport 30,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 380,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Success StoryAs told by Hanifa of Luwum Street, Kampala“After my mother passed away in 1995 I inherited the material business from her. I had completed O’Level and could not continue with my education. My mother had always taught me how she was running this business during my school holidays. Actually, I did the purchasing and stocktaking with her. So when I inherited the business I already had some skills and experi-ence. Now I sell dress materials, boding (gomesi) material, Kitenges (African wear). I get my materials from Dubai, Congo, Nigeria and other countries. At present I am taking care of my young brother who is a university student, and my two sisters who are in A’ Level. I sell my materials at wholesale prices and this policy has attracted many customers. I am very proud that my business is running very well.”

Information / Training Provider• Established material shops• Business schools

MaterialsThe materials are available at wholesale shops and market places or even factories.

Work placeFor this enterprise, a fl oor space of about 4x4 paces is needed, which should be divided into a sales area and a storeroom.

EquipmentThe counter, shelves, working table and the hanging rails can be made by a carpentry workshop; the other equip-ment can be found in shops and markets. The equipment may include:• Counter• Hanging rails (for display of materials)• Pair of scissors • Shelves• Tape measure • Working table

PersonnelIdeally, one person could run this business. He or she should be able to identify the tastes of his/her customers and should have good communication skills.

MarketThe market for general goods is all year round, but there is higher demand during the festive seasons. Materials can be sold at the following places• Hospitals • Hotels / Restaurants• Trading centres

Opportunities• Contracts for supplying hotels and restaurants• Increase sales during festive days, village market days• Provide quality and unique materials• Provide fashionable clothes

Challenges• Competition from other sellers• Damage to goods if not handled well• Dust and dirt• Limited market in rural areas• Misjudging the seasons and tastes, which could lead to unsold stock

Page 127: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

127Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about offering consumer goods to the general public for personal or household use. These items may include rice, sugar, beans, soap etc. The goods are bought in large quantities at wholesale prices and sold in smaller quantities at higher prices with a certain profi t margin.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000Materials (Goods) 300,000Transport 30,000Rent 50,000Total Amount 480,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials (Goods) 300,000Transport 30,000Rent 50,000Total Amount 385,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

GROCERY SHOPGROCERY SHOP

Success StoryAs told by Asha of Richmond enterprises Entebbe.“In 1996 I worked as a shop attendant in Entebbe town, after failing to continue with my education due to lack of school fees. My aunt took me from my village where I was living with my parents, to work in her shop. In that shop, I gained skills and experience. I worked for her for about two years and received a monthly salary. Then, with the help of my sister, I opened a small grocery shop. I sold consumer goods and my shop was doing well. From the profi ts, I saved some money and could afford to expand the business with a bar. During the day, I sell from my shop and at night from the bar. This has enabled me to meet my daily needs and even pay for the rent of my house.”

Information / Training Provider• Business schools• Established grocery shops• Ministry of Tourism, Trade and Industry

MaterialsThe materials are available at wholesale shops and market places or factories.

Work placeFor the enterprise, a fl oor space of about 5x5 paces is needed, divided into a sales area and a storeroom.

EquipmentThe counter, shelves and working table can be ordered at a carpentry workshop, while the other equipment can be found in shops and markets. The equipment may include:• Counter• Polythene bags• Shelves• Weighing scales• Working table

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business. He or she should be able to identify the customers’ needs and should have good communication skills.

MarketThe market for grocery items is in rural and urban areas throughout the year, with higher demand during festive seasons.

Opportunities• Contract to supply hotels and restaurants• Increase sales during village market days and festive days• Provide better service for a good reputation• Provide quality and unique products• Provide variety of goods

Challenges• Competition from other sellers• Dust and dirt• Damage due to bad handling• Decay due to long storage• Outstanding debts• Limited market in rural places

Page 128: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own128

HAIRDRESSERS SALONINTRODUCTIONThis business involves cutting, styling, colouring and chemically reforming hair, etc. It also provides treatments such as sham-pooing, scalp conditioning, retouching, steaming, dying and advising on hair care, beauty products and hairstyles.

HAIRDRESSERS SALON

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for the business 300,000Materials 50,000Utilities (Electricity, Water) 40,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 430,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 50,000Utilities (Electricity, Water) 40,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 125,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Beauty colleges• Established salons• Vocational training institutions

MaterialsChemicals, shampoos and oils are available at wholesale beauty shops.

Work placeFor this enterprise, you need a fl oor space of about 4x4 paces with water and electricity supply.

EquipmentThe equipment can be found in beauty wholesale shops, and the chair and table can be made by a carpentry workshop.• Brush • Chairs• Combs • Hair drier• Mirror • Pair of scissors• Razor blades • Rollers• Table

PersonnelIdeally, three people can run this business. They should know about using various chemicals suitable for different kinds of hair and hair cutting.

MarketThere is a market in urban and rural areas, throughout the year and a higher demand during festive seasons.

Opportunities• Better quality, better reputation

Challenges• Poor handling causes skin problems• Skills needed for using chemicals• Limited market

Page 129: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

129Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONHousekeeping involves cleaning, washing, baby sitting and cooking against payment. It is done for households, hotels, motels and schools etc.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Decent dressing 10,000Transport 10,000Total Amount 20,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Maintenance of dress 3,000Transport 10,000Total Amount 13,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

HOUSEKEEPING SERVICEHOUSEKEEPING SERVICE

Success StoryAs told by Silvia of Grand Imperial Hotel, Kampala.“I dropped out of school in senior three after I lost my parents. I looked for a job but all in vain since I had no experience. I got a job as a shop attendant with the help of a friend. There I earned only 30,000 shillings per month so I could not cater for the needs of my two little sisters and myself. I decided to look for something else. I found a job with an Indian Lady as a housekeeper (house girl). At least I was paid 50,000 Shillings per month. I worked there for about two years until the Lady enrolled me for a catering training course at YMCA. I went to school in the morning hours and worked in the evening. The course took me nine-months and she even paid my fees. When my boss left the country I was back on the street again. This time I aimed to work at hotels, not in households. I fi nally got a job in the Grand Imperial Hotel as a housekeeper. Now I meet my daily needs comfortably and can support my younger sisters who are going for the UPE (Universal Primary Education).

Information / Training Provider• Catering Institutes• Experienced housekeepers

MaterialsMaterials, equipment and work place are usually provided, where the service is required to take place.

PersonnelIt is a one-man job. Personnel can undergo training in for work in places like hotels and motels. In all cases, the person should be clean and trustworthy.

MarketThis business involves moving to different places in order to work there. These places may include:• Hotels• Households• Inns• Motels• Restaurants

Opportunities• Develop trustworthy relationship• Expand services to others• Provide quality services

Challenges• Limited market in rural setting• Low pay for housekeepers• Mistrust by clients• Social disrespect

No capital is required for the housekeeping service if performed individually.

Page 130: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own130

ICE CREAM SHOPINTRODUCTIONThis business involves buying ice cream from processing plants or ice cream parlours in large quantities at a wholesale price and selling it with a profi t margin in small quantities. The ice cream shop is normally mounted on a bicycle which moves from one place to another to look for customers, or just goes to public places.

ICE CREAM SHOP

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 150,000Materials 50,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 220,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials 50,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 75,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Information / Training Provider• Established ice cream shops• Ice cream outlets• Ice cream producers• Vocational catering institutes

MaterialsIce cream is bought from ice cream producers or ice cream outlets.

Work placeFor this business only a store room of about 2x2 paces is needed; the activity is done by bike.

EquipmentThe equipment, as well as the bicycle, is available in super-markets, shops and markets.• Bicycle• Ice box• Horn• Spoons

PersonnelIdeally, one person can run this business. The person should be clean.

MarketThe demand for Ice cream is high during the dry seasons and on hot days. It can be sold in the following places:• Bus stations • Households• Market places• Schools• Sports area• Taxi Parks• Trading centres

Opportunities• Dry hot days• Public occasions• School breaks

Challenges• Diffi culties in maintaining hygiene standards• Limited market in rural places• Decay due to poor and/or long storage• Low sales due to prolonged, cold and wet seasons

Page 131: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

131Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves providing the public with information according to their interest and depending on the prevailing condi-tions within the particular location. Most information agents provide information about employment, houses for rent, plots for sale etc.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 30,000Materials 50,000Utilities (Telephone) 100,000Transport 50,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 250,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials 50,000Utilities (Telephone) 100,000Transport 50,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 225,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

INFORMATION AGENTINFORMATION AGENT

Information / Training Provider• Business schools• Established information providers• Radio stations

MaterialsThe required materials are available at stationary shops.

Work placeFor this enterprise, an offi ce of about 3x3 paces is needed. The service can also be done under shelters.

EquipmentA working table can be manufactured by a carpentry workshop.

PersonnelIdeally, two people can run this business. They should know how and where to fi nd the requested information and they should have good communication skills.

MarketThe market is throughout the year, in urban and rural areas, and includes the following people:• Expatriates• General public• Households• Investors• Job seekers

Opportunities• Provision of a wider range of information• Main agent for NGOs, CBOs

Challenges• Limited market• Failure of payment• Competition by radio stations, other agents

Page 132: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own132

IRONING SERVICEINTRODUCTIONThis business involves ironing (pressing) all kinds of clothes and textiles, commonly known as ‘Dobbi’. Most of the time, the clients have to deliver their clothes to the premises where the service is being offered, or the clothes can also be collected from and delivered to the client.

IRONING SERVICE

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for the ironing business 40,000Utilities (Electricity) 30,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 100,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Utility (Electricity) 30,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 65,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Work placeFor this enterprise a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces with a constant power supply is needed. The ironing is done in a room of about 2x2 paces and the remaining is used for storage purposes. If electricity is not available, a charcoal driven iron can be used.

EquipmentThe working table and hanging rail can be made by a car-pentry workshop; the iron is available in an electronic shop and the basins in local shops.

PersonnelIdeally, two people who know how to iron can run this busi-ness, with both engaged in the work.

MarketThere is a market for ironing all year, and mostly in urban areas. The service can be done in the following places• Cafes• Hotels and Restaurants• Households• Lodges• Market places• Universities

Opportunities• Provide better service for a good reputation• Expand the business to laundering and cleaning of textiles

Challenges• Loss or damage of clients’ clothes• Good ironing needs much attention• Good knowledge required to choose appropriate heat for different materials

Success StoryAs told by Ismail Bukenya of Smart Dobbi in Bweyogerere.“In 1998 I opened this ironing service when I was a senior two student at St. Mathew Secondary School. About one year ago my father passed away and my mother could not afford to cater for the seven of us. So I had to start this business with a charcoal iron, and six months later I was in a position to buy an electric one. Because of my hard work I gained popular-ity around Bweyogerere, and more customers meant more income. I am now four years in this business. With my savings I could buy bicycles which I lend out for boda boda services around the Bweyogerere state. I am contributing to our family needs and my mother and I are able to pay the fees for my four brothers and sisters who are still at school.”

Information / Training Provider• Established ironing services• Catering institutes

Page 133: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

133Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThe business involves buying kerosene from fuel stations in large quantities at a wholesale price and selling it with a profi t margin per litre, half a litre, bottle, or spoon.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 20,000Materials 50,000Transport 10,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 100,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials 50,000Transport 10,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 85,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

KEROSENE TRADINGKEROSENE TRADING

Information / Training Provider• Established kerosene traders• Fuel stations

MaterialsThe kerosene is available from fuel stations and fuel depots.

Work placeFor this business a sales and store room of about 2x2 paces is needed. This room should have ventilation.

EquipmentThe required equipment for this business can be found at shops, markets and may include:• Bottles• Funnel• Hose• Jerry cans• Spoons

PersonnelOne person can effectively run this business.

MarketThe market for this business is best in places with no hydroelectric power. Although in urban areas it is used for cooking. Kerosene is mostly sold to households.

Opportunities• Sell for evening functions or gatherings

Challenges• Dangerous material, very fl ammable• Long storage may lead to decay• Sales in small quantities in rural settings• Transportation may be diffi cult

Page 134: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own134

LANDSCAPE PLANNING AND DESIGNINTRODUCTIONThis business is about designing land areas for projects such as institutions, schools, play grounds, roads, external areas for all kinds of buildings, commercial, industrial and residential sites. It involves planning where to plant different types of trees and plants.

LANDSCAPE PLANNING AND DESIGN

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for the landscape planning and designing business 100,000 Materials 70,000Transport 20,000Utility (Water) 5,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 235,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 70,000Transport 20,000Utility (Water) 5,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 145,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MaterialsThe landscapes are provided by the client. Either the client or you will be responsible for purchasing the trees, plants and fl owers.

Work placeAn offi ce space of about 4x4 paces is needed, where the tools can also be kept.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be found at hardware shops and they may include:• Hand hoe• Measuring tape• Ropes• Spade• Watering can / pipes

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and should have the knowledge of fl owers, plants, trees, etc.

MarketThe market is mostly located in urban areas including the following places:• Beaches• Companies• Hotels• Households• Prayer houses• Working places

Opportunities• Provide unique service• Provide quality service• Maintain good and long term relationship with customers

Challenges• Dry weather conditions can spoil the plants• Limited market• Restricted market in rural settings

Information / Training Provider• Art and design colleges• Established landscape planner and designers

Page 135: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

135Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business includes laundering and cleaning all kinds of clothes and textiles by using washing detergents and other equip-ment. Normally the clients have to deliver their clothes to the premises where the service is offered or they can also be col-lected and delivered to the client.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 20,000Materials 20,000Transport 20,000Rent 30,000Utility (Water) 5,000Total Amount 95,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials 20,000Transport 20,000Rent 30,000Utility (Water) 5,000Total Amount 80,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

LAUNDERING AND CLEANING OF LAUNDERING AND CLEANING OF TEXTILES

MaterialsWashing detergents can be found in local shops and supermarkets.

Work placeFor the washing a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces with constant water supply is needed. An opening area, with a clothes line, is also needed for drying.

EquipmentThe equipment is available in shops and markets and they may include:• Basins • Cloth hangers • Jerry cans • Soft brush• Strings for hanging clothes

PersonnelIdeally three people can run this business and one of them should have the knowledge of handling different kinds of clothes and textiles.

MarketThe market is available throughout the year and mostly in urban areas. The business can be done in the following places• Colleges• Construction sites• Factories• Hotels• Households• Lodges• Boarding Schools• Hostels

Opportunities• Provide better service for better reputation• Expand the business with ironing• Expand the business with a laundry machine

Challenges• Clothes may get misplaced• Labour demanding• Lots of attention is required when laundering

Success StoryAs told by Namwanje of Makerere University“In 1995 I started washing clothes at the Makerere University in Kampala. It was a friend who introduced me to this kind of business. At that time I used to charge 100 Shillings per cloth. Today I am charging 250 Shillings per cloth. My profi t per week is about 30,000 Shillings, after paying all the running costs. This amount is helping me to support my family and my son is going to the Bat Valley primary school.”

Information / Training Provider• Established laundry shops• Catering institutes

Page 136: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own136

LOCKSMITHINTRODUCTIONThis business is about installing and maintaining keys and locks. It mainly focuses on cutting new or duplicating keys for house and car doors as well as padlocks. These keys are made out of unshaped keys using key cutters. Old keys can also be modifi ed to fi t in other locks. Opening locked safes, doors or padlocks by manipulation is also part of this business.

LOCKSMITH

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 150,000Materials 70,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 240,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 70,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 100,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MaterialsThe materials can be found at tool shops and old keys can also be used.

Work placeFor the enterprise a fl oor space of about 2x2 paces is needed.

EquipmentA working table can be made by a carpentry workshop and key cutters are available from manufacturers. The equip-ment may include:• File• Hammer• Key cutters• Screwdriver• Spare keys• Working table

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business and should have the knowledge of cutting keys.

MarketThis business has a higher demand in urban areas and this service can be offered to the following markets: • Households• Trading centres• Vehicle owners• Working places

Opportunities• Provide quality work• Contracts with organisations• Expand business to making metal signs

Challenges• Market is limited• Access to materials may be limited• Failure of payments

Information / Training Provider• Technical institutes• Established locksmith• Technical schools

Page 137: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

137Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves performing manicures and pedicures for fi ngernails and toenails. It includes decorative nail art, applica-tion of artifi cial nails and nail repair. The nails are cleaned with nail polish remover, shortened and shaped by a nail cutter and buffer, nail polish is then applied in preferred colours.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 30,000Materials (Nail polish, remover) 20,000Transport 10,000Total Amount 60,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Replacement and repair of equipment 3,000Materials (Nail polish, remover) 15,000Transport 10,000Total Amount 28,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MANICURE SERVICETEXTILESMANICURE SERVICE

MaterialsThe required materials can be bought from cosmetic shops, beauty shops and supermarkets.

Work placePedicures and manicures can be performed in salons or as a home service.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be bought from cosmetic and beauty shops and these include:• Basin• Chair• Nail cutter• Nail fi le• Pair of scissors

PersonnelOne person can run this business and should know how to polish and treat nails.

MarketThe market is mainly for females throughout the year. Pedi-cure and manicure can be done in the following places• Fitness clubs• Hotels• Households• Market places• Salons• Street vending

Opportunities• Contract with salons• Long-term relationship with customers• Deliver quality service

Challenges• Competition• Limited market• Requirement of experience and skills• Special care when providing the service

Information / Training Provider• Beauty colleges• Salons• Established manicure services• School of art

Page 138: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own138

MILK SHOPMILK SHOP

Page 139: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

139Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about providing batteries, cables, bulbs or tubes for lighting different functions. In areas where electrical power is limited, trading is more focused on selling batteries, otherwise where the standard power is available the lighting equipment drives the business. According to the facility (building, tent, etc.) the wiring is temporarily installed. Bulbs or fl uorescent tubes are connected and the wiring system is linked to the power supply system. Apart from household use, lighting is required in the evening or nights for public gatherings and functions.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 200,000Utilities (Electric power, Battery charging) 20,000Transport 30,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 270,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Utilities (Electric power, Battery charging) 20,000Transport 30,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 90,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MOBILE LIGHTINGMOBILE LIGHTING

MaterialsThe materials can be found in electronic shops and su-permarkets.

Work placeFor this enterprise a store of about 2x2 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe equipment is available at hardware shops and electronic shops and it may include:• Battery• Bulbs or tubes• Cables• Electric clamps• Lamp holders• Screw driver• Cellotape• Voltage tester

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and should have knowledge of electronic wiring.

MarketThe market is in rural and urban areas and can be sold to the following groups:• Functions, Weddings• Graduation ceremonies• Parties• Bars, Cafes• Restaurants• Sports events

Opportunities• Expand business with audio system• Provide different kinds of lighting effects• Ceremonies, Festivals

Challenges• Danger of theft • Danger of working at night• No fi xed market exists• Skills and experience is required• Knowledge of electrical safety standards is required

Information / Training Provider• Uganda Electricity Board• Electronic shops • Vocational training schools

Page 140: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own140

MOBILE MUSIC SERVICEINTRODUCTIONThis business is about providing entertainment by playing music in particular places such as tents, halls etc. Everyone who wishes to be entertained pays for this service. Different kinds of music are played by inserting tapes or CDs in a player, which is connected to loudspeakers. The music is not stationed at one place but moved according to clients request to different places.

MOBILE MUSIC SERVICE

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 380,000Materials (Tapes, CDs) 30,000Utilities (Electricity or Batteries) 30,000Transport 40,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 500,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials (Tapes, CDs) 30,000Utilities (Electricity or Batteries) 30,000Transport 40,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 125,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Sources of materialsMusic tapes and CDs can be found in music shops and supermarkets.

Work placeSince the music is mobile, a fl oor space of about 2x2 paces is needed as store.

EquipmentThe electronic equipment can be bought from electronic shops or supermarkets and a working table can be made by a carpentry workshop. The equipment may include:• Cassettes • CDs• Loud speakers • Mobile music systems• Working table

PersonnelIdeally three people can run this business and should be able to identify clients’ tastes and operate the music systems.

MarketThe demand in rural and urban settings is higher during weekends and public holidays. Music can be played to those who like to be entertained. The equipment can also be used for teaching and education purposes. • Bus stations• Gathering halls• Sports arena• Taxi parks• Trading centre

Opportunities• Contracts for special occasions (weddings)• Contracts with restaurants, hotels, schools• Expand the business for selling audio cassettes• Expand the business to health teaching, such as relaxing music• Expand the business to education • Rent out the equipment

Challenges• Business is mostly at night• Equipment may get stolen• May not be supported by the community

Information / Training Provider• Bars / Hotels• Established mobile music services• Music recording studios

Page 141: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

141Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThe business is about maintaining and repairing telephone handsets by identifying the defective parts. Most of the time the internal parts have to be cleaned and the broken items repaired or replaced.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000Materials (Spare Parts) 200,000Utilities (Electricity) 10,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 340,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Materials (Spare Parts) 100,000Utilities (Electricity) 10,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 160,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MOBILE PHONE REPAIR SERVICEMOBILE PHONE REPAIR SERVICE

MaterialsThe required materials can be found at electronic shops and phone shops in big towns.

Work placeFor this service a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces with electric power supply is needed.

EquipmentThe required equipment is available in electronic shops and the working table can be made at a carpentry workshop. The equipment may include:• Brushes • Chargers• Electronic tool kit • Knives• Pliers • Screwdriver• Soddering iron • Testers• Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business. The personnel must have knowledge of electronics.

MarketMobile phone repair has a constant market and it is mainly in urban areas. Customers are usually mobile phone users.

Opportunities• Obtain maintenance contracts of organisations’ equipment• Provide quality service to increase reputation / credibility• Extend services to other areas

Challenges• Consistency of service quality• Failure to identify problems• Failure to meet deadlines• Limited market in rural settings• Network not functioning properly• Power failure / cuts• Unavailability of some spare parts

Information / Training Provider• Electronic workshops• Mobile phone companies• Technical institutes• Technical schools

Page 142: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own142

MOBILE TRADINGINTRODUCTIONThis business is about trading different kinds of items, such as mosquito nets, clothes, shoes, belts, bags, etc. by moving from one place to another to look for customers or just go to public places. The items are bought in big quantities and are offered for sale with a profi t margin in smaller quantities.

MOBILE TRADING

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for the business 10,000Materials 100,000Rent (store) 20,000Transport 20,000Total Amount 150,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Replacement of equipment 5,000Materials 100,000Rent 20,000Transport 20,000Total Amount 145,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MaterialsThe items can be found in wholesale shops, factories and market places.

Work placeThe trader moves from place to place looking for clients. A room of about 2x2 paces for storage is required.

EquipmentBags are available in local shops.

PersonnelIdeally one person could run this business.

MarketThe market for this business is found in urban settings. The following places are good for trading:• Bus stations • Hotels• Households • Main roads• Markets • Public building• Taxi parks • Working places

Opportunities• Establish a shop• Increase quantity on market days• Market days• Sell secondhand items• Receive special orders

Challenges• Exposed to climate conditions• Labor demanding• Limited market• Potential damage of goods due to extreme climate

Information / Training Provider• Business schools• Factories• Manufacturing industries• Wholesale shops

Page 143: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

143Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about maintaining and repairing motorbikes in order to increase their life span and to keep them in good work-ing condition. Fixing faulty parts or even changing new parts or tires is also included in this activity.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the motor bike repair service (Toolbox) 100,000 Utility (Water) 2,000Rent (store and shade) 40,000Total Amount 142,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Utility (Water) 2,000Rent (store and shade) 40,000Total Amount 52,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MOTORBIKE (BODA BODA) SERVICE STATIONMOTORBIKE (BODA BODA) SERVICE STATION

MaterialsThese can be found in motorbike spare part shops.

Work placeFor this enterprise a shade of about 4x4 paces and a store room of about 2x2 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe equipment is available in tool stores, hardware shops, markets and spare part shops. The equipment may include:• Cutter• Filler gauge• Hammer• Level• Pliers• Pressure gauge• Screw drivers• Set of spanners• Tire repair kit

PersonnelTwo people can run this business and should have the knowledge of maintaining and repairing motorbikes.

MarketThere is a high demand in urban settings. This service can be offered to commercial and motorbike users.

Opportunities• Provide quality service• Obtain orders from different organisations for assembling larger quantities• Offer maintenance service to big organisations

Challenges• Limited market and competition• Limited skills• Limited tools• Maintain the standard of service• Some spare parts are not affordable in rural setting• Some spare parts are not available• Storage needs a lot of space

Information / Training Provider• Technical institutes• Spare parts shops• Established motorbike service stations

Page 144: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own144

MOWING SERVICEINTRODUCTIONThis business is about trimming grass in private or public compounds, which may include schools, hotels, parks, etc. The methods for mowing are with a slashing tool, manual mower or petrol driven string-mower.

MOWING SERVICE

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business (Slashing tool) 4,000Basic equipment for this business (String-mower) 500,000Utilities (Fuel) 50,000Total Amount 554,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment (Slashing tool) 4,000Repair and maintenance of equipment (String-mower) 20,000Utilities (Fuel) 50,000Total Amount 74,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Work placeThis business is carried out at the client’s premise and only a small room is necessary to store the equipment.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be bought from hardware shops and they include:• String mower• Slashing tool• Boots• Rake

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business and should have the knowledge of mowing.

MarketThe market for mowing is throughout the year and it is most common in urban areas. Mowing can be done in the following places• Hotels• Households• Schools• Sports grounds• Working places

Opportunities• Advertise services in crowded areas • Obtain contracts with housing estates, hotels, schools etc.• Offer services in various places• Provide better services for a better reputation

Challenges• Labour demanding• Training opportunities are limited• Limited market in rural settings

Success StoryAs told by Apuke Michael of Kyambogo.“I have been running my mowing service for three years within Kyambogo. I started by just using a manual mower. After about two years I was able to buy a petrol driven string-mower from my savings. My earnings are now three times higher than in the beginning. I am getting an average of about 45,000 Shillings per week. Normally I have contracts with housing estates and the Kyambogo University.”

Information / Training Provider• Established mowing services• Forestry college

Page 145: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

145Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about buying newspapers in large quantities at wholesale prices from publishing companies and selling them at a published price per piece. Several newspapers are published daily such as The Monitor, The New Vision, Bukede, Rupiny, East Africa whereas others are distributed on a fi xed day like Sunday Vision, etc.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 30,000Materials (Newspaper) 50,000Transport 20,000Total Amount 100,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Maintenance of clothes 3,000Materials (Newspaper) 50,000Transport 20,000Total Amount 73,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

NEWSPAPER SELLINGSTATIONNEWSPAPER SELLING

MaterialsNewspapers can be bought from newspaper publishers or just even from a local newspaper bureau.

Work placeMost of the business takes place in the open air, but a small store is required.

EquipmentA bag for holding the newspaper and a display board made at a carpentry workshop are very useful.

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business and should have good communication skills.

MarketThe market for newspaper in urban and rural settings is throughout the year.

Opportunities• Provide all kinds of newspapers for a wider market• Supply newspapers to various places• Offer a quick service• Supplying contracts for organisations• Supplying contracts for government offi ces• Rent out expensive magazines, children‘s books for a certain fees

Challenges• Limited market in rural settings• Exposed to weather conditions• Competition

Success StoryAs told by Mugisha of Entebbe town.“In 1986 I started this Newspaper selling business in Entebbe town. At that time I had no other work to do. Mostly I sold ‚The New Vision‘. Later I expanded my sales with other Newspapers such as ‚The Monitor‘, ‚East Africa‘, ‚Bukedi‘ and ‚Rupiny‘. My income was the commission I received from the newspaper publisher. In the beginning the market was small, because I only dealt with one kind of newspaper. As more and more Newspapers were published it gave me the chance to widen my range and therefore my earnings increased. I got some contracts for supplying some shops in the town. Even now, when the competition is growing, my customers like me and the way I serve them. Even after getting a job at the International Airport Entebbe, I have not given up my Newspaper business. I have employed someone who does the newspaper selling for me, if I work the day shift, but if I am working during the night I continue my business. My family, my wife and three children can live a comfortable life.”

Information / Training Provider• Newspaper publisher• Established newspaper vendors

Page 146: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own146

NURSERY SCHOOLINTRODUCTIONThis business focuses on group activities, primarily to introduce very young children to the anticipated school-type environ-ment. This business helps children to learn the basics of education such as writing their names, colours, counting numbers and the alphabet. The pupils are recruited and sited into classrooms, where teaching by using drawing boards, pictures and toys takes place.

NURSERY SCHOOL

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for a nursery school 200,000Learning Materials (Books) 100,000Rent 100,000Total Amount 400,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Learning Materials (Books) 50,000Rent 100,000Total Amount 170,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MaterialsMaterials for this business are available at stationers, bookshops and printing presses.

Work placeFor this enterprise a fl oor space of about 10x10 paces is needed, which is to be divided into different classes. Further a playground for the children should be included.

EquipmentThe required furniture can be made by a carpentry work-shop, and the stationary can be bought from supermarkets or local shops. • Benches• Books• Chairs• Colours• Drawing board• Pencils• Toys• Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business, while both are engaged in teaching. The persons should be trustworthy and should know how and what to teach this group of children.

MarketThere is high demand for good schools in rural and urban setting. The acceptance by the Ministry of Education and Sports and the school fees are the determining factors.

Opportunities• Provide a good and reliable service to improve reputation• Provide good education

Challenges• Accidents of kids• Limited market in rural settings• Requires offi cial teaching qualifi cations

Success StoryAs told by Harriet Dikan of Eneneza Nursery School, Tororo.“In 1996 I started my nursery school after graduating as a nursery school teacher. In my fi rst year I had only 20 children, whereas today 80 children are enrolled in my school. With the earnings from this school I can support my family and I could even buy a plot of land to expand my school.”

Information / Training Provider• Education offi cials • Ministry of Education and Sports• Teacher Training colleges• YWCA

Page 147: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

147Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about applying paint, varnish, wallpaper and other fi nishing to protect, maintain and decorate the surfaces of buildings and structures. The process consists of fi rstly preparing surfaces by removing old paint and wallpaper, fi xing woodwork, fi lling holes and cracks, smoothing and sealing surfaces. The second step is preparing paints and varnishes in the required colours by mixing portions of pigment, oil, and thinning and drying additives. Finally the fi nish is applied by using brushes, rollers and spray guns.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the painting service business (without spray gun) 50,000Rent 20,000Transport 10,000Total Amount 80,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Rent 20,000Transport 10,000Total Amount 35,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

PAINTING SERVICEPAINTING SERVICE

MaterialsPaint is usually provided by the client and can be found in paint shops, hardware shops or even in supermarkets.

Work placeFor this enterprise a store room of about 2x2 paces is needed to store the equipment.

EquipmentThe equipment can be found in hardware shops and may include:• Broom • Brush / Spray guns• Buckets• Filler• Rollers• Sand papers• Spray gun

PersonnelIdeally two persons can offer this service and should have the knowledge of painting.

MarketThe market is available throughout the year. Painting can be done in the following places• Construction sites• Factories• Households• Public buildings• Trading centres

Opportunities• Service contracts for construction sites, house estates• Provide consistent quality of service for establishing a good reputation

Challenges• Competition• Limited market in rural setting• Requirement of experience and skills

Information / Training Provider• Construction companies• Established painters• Technical institutes

Page 148: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own148

PANEL BEATING AND SPRAY PAINTINGINTRODUCTIONThis business is about repairing damages on the metal body of vehicles by removing damaged panels, parts, upholstery and accessories in order to access and fi x a particular spot. The metal panel beating is done by using the panel-beating hammer for removing the dents. Mechanical or hydraulic equipment helps to straighten the damaged parts. Sometimes the use of welding equipment is needed.

PANEL BEATING AND SPRAY PAINTING

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 300,000Materials 100,000Rent (open space and store) 70,000Total Amount 470,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Materials 100,000Rent 70,000Total Amount 190,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MaterialsMaterials are available at hardware and paint shops.

Work placeFor this enterprise an open space of about 10x10 paces is needed, which is to be used as car park. A small store of about 2x2 paces is necessary.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be bought from hardware shops and may include:• Compressor• Filler• Hammer• Sandpaper• Scrapper• Spray gun• Steel brush

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and should have the knowledge of vehicle painting.

MarketThe market is available throughout the year and it is mainly vehicle owners and drivers.

Opportunities• Service contracts for companies • Service contracts for organisations• Develop a trustworthy relationship with the client• Provide quality service

Challenges• Limited market in rural settings• Risk with people’s vehicles• Mistrust by clients

Information / Training Provider• Existing panel-beating and paint services• Garages• Technical institutes• Technical schools

Page 149: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

149Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about providing care and treatment of domestic pets, such as dogs, cats etc. to improve their health and avoid further infection and contamination to others, including human beings.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the pet clinic 100,000Materials (Drugs) 200,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 330,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Materials (Drugs) 100,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 150,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

PET CLINICPET CLINIC

MaterialsDrugs can be obtained from veterinary drug shops.

Work placeFor this enterprise a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed.

EquipmentA working table can be made by a carpentry workshop, chains can be found in hardware shops while syringes and needles are available at the drug shops.• Cabinet (lockable)• Chains• Container• Needles• Syringe• Tray• Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and at least one should have a veterinary certifi cate.

MarketThe market is available throughout the year. It is most popular with the people who keep and trade pets.

Opportunities• Offer home visits to individuals• Supply service to stockbreeders

Challenges• Limited market• Skills and certifi cate required• Non availability of certain drugs

Information / Training Provider• Veterinary clinics• Health centres• Drug shops• Medical schools

Page 150: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own150

PIZZA BAKERYINTRODUCTIONThis business is about baking pizzas. Pizza literally means ‘pie’. To make a pizza you fi rst need to make dough, which in-volves mixing ingredients such as wheat fl our, water and oil. The dough is then rolled to form a fl at and round base. Cheese, tomato sauce, beef, chicken, fi sh, different kind of fruits and vegetables are added on top before the pizza is put in the oven for baking.

PIZZA BAKERY

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for the pizza bakery 200,000Materials 50,000Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 40,000Rent 50,000Total Amount 340,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 15,000Materials 50,000Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 40,000Rent 50,000Total Amount 155,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MaterialsThe raw materials can be found in local shops, markets and supermarkets.

Work placeFor this enterprise a fl oor space of about 5x5 paces with water supply is needed. The space should be divided into a production, and sales room.

EquipmentThe equipment can be found in local shops, markets and supermarkets and may include: • Charcoal stove• Cooling rack• Cutting knife• Frying pan• Hand towels• Knife• Oven• Rolling pin• Spoon• Trays• Working table

PersonnelIdeally three people can run this business and they should know how to make pizza.

MarketThe demand for pizza is higher in urban areas. It can be sold in the following places• Hotels • Restaurants• Cafes • Sport areas

Opportunities• Provide quality pizzas • Contracts for supplying restaurants, hotels• Public occasions / Village market days

Challenges• Limited market for pizza products• Decay due to long and / or poor storage• Potential burning if improperly heated

Information / Training Provider• Bakeries• Catering institutes• Existing pizza bakeries• Uganda Industrial Research Institute

Page 151: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

151Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about fabricating, laying, installing and maintaining of pipes, fi xtures and sewage systems. It also includes the repairing of piping systems and fi xtures such as toilets, wash basins, bath tubs and drainage if they are blocked due to various reasons.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the plumbing service business 150,000Transport 20,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 190,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Transport 20,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 50,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

PLUMBING SERVICEPLUMBING SERVICE

MaterialsThe material is usually provided by the client and can be found in hardware shops or construction material shops.

Work placeFor this enterprise a store of about 2x2 paces is required.

EquipmentThe required equipment is available in tool shops, hardware shops and may include:• Hammer • Pair of pliers• Pipe ranges • Pumps• Screwdriver • Spanner• Threading die

PersonnelIdeally three people can run this business and should have the knowledge of plumbing.

MarketThe market is available throughout the year. Plumbing can be done in the following places• Construction sites• Factories• Hospitals• Hotels• Households• Public buildings • Restaurants• Schools• Trading centres

Opportunities• Service contracts with construction sites• Service contracts with house estates• Provide quality service for good, reliable reputation• Sanitation projects

Challenges• Competition• Limited market in rural settings• Needs a lot of experience and skills• Transporting the tools may be diffi cult

Information / Training Provider• Construction companies• Established plumbing services• Local water authorities• Technical institutes

Page 152: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own152

PUBLIC LAVATORY INTRODUCTIONThis business is about providing a lavatory for the public to use. It can be a pit latrine or a fl ush water toilet in a room where the necessary plumbing installation is done. The service provider usually provides toilet paper, washing soap and a towel.

PUBLIC LAVATORY

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for the plumbing installation 250,000Materials (Brushes, basins, rugs) 20,000Materials (Detergents, toilet papers) 20,000Rent 10,000Utilities (Water) 20,000Total Amount 320,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials (Detergents, toilet papers) 15,000Rent 10,000Utilities (Water) 20,000Total Amount 55,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Work placeFor this business a room of about 1x1 paces is required. Pit latrines do not need constant water supply, however a small amount of water is needed for hand-washing that can be hand-carried. Flush water closets demand a constant and good water supply. Ideally it should be a running water system or this business should be located close to a water source because substantial amount of water is required.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be found in local shops, markets or supermarkets and they may include:• Basins• Bucket• Toilet brush• Toilet paper holder• Trash bin

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business.

MarketThe market for this business is mainly in high-populated areas and these may include:• Bus and Taxi parks• Fuel stations• Market places • Town centres• Trading centres

Opportunities• Provide clean lavatories• Construct several lavatories in different locations• Expand business with showers

Challenges• Lack of hygienic conditions• Lack of water• Acceptance by the community

Information / Training Provider• Established businesses• Local government• Ministry of Water

Page 153: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

153Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves buying food, cooking it and serving it to the public for payment. In addition, beverages like sodas and juices are also sold. Restaurants can serve fast food, snacks or even traditional food.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the business 250,000Materials 150,000Labour 30,000Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 100,000Rent 50,000Transport 30,000Total Amount 610,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair & maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 100,000Labour 30,000Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 25,000Rent 50,000Transport 30,000Total Amount 245,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

RESTAURANT SERVICERESTAURANT SERVICE

MaterialsRaw materials for this business can be bought from whole-salers, market places, shops and gardens.

Work placeFor this enterprise a room of about 5x5 paces is needed, with a clean water supply available. The room is to be divided into a kitchen and a dining area. Electricity or a generator will be necessary if you want to be open for business in the evenings, and if you require a fridge/freezer. Both the kitchen and dining area must be kept clean and meet hygiene standards.

EquipmentThe equipment can be bought from shops, markets or locally fabricated. The equipment may include:• Charcoal stove• Cooking utensils (sauce pans, plates, glasses, spoons, knives, forks etc.)• Refrigerator / ice containers for cold drinks• Tables for eating and working• Chairs, benches • Washing container

PersonnelIdeally fi ve people can run this business whereas one of them should be a leader and others are being involved in cooking and serving. The servers must show good customer service.

MarketThe business requires a place where people are not able to prepare their own food. This market may include:• Working places • Market places• School canteens • Bus and taxi parks

Opportunities• Quality service leads to more business opportunities• Social gatherings, meetings, celebrations• Outside catering during public occasions, sports events, weddings

Challenges• Changes in weather • Lack of storage facilities • Limited market • Low sales • Social and political infl uences

Success StoryAs told by Grace Apio of Homeland restaurant„I opened my restaurant in 1999 after joining a women group that used to collect money from all its members and give it to one member on a monthly basis. Money is contributed by each of our nine members and lend to one member of the group in turn. I was given my initial contribution, which was 450,000 shillings. I began my business and three years later my business is worth over two million Shillings. The reason for my success is hard work, commitment and emphasis on a good service and good meals.“

Information / Training Provider• Catering institutes• Established businesses

Page 154: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own154

ROCK SALT SELLINGINTRODUCTIONThis business involves buying salt in large quantities at wholesale prices and selling it at a higher price in to move from one place to another on market days where large numbers of cattle keepers look for salt for their cows.

ROCK SALT SELLING

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 150,000Materials (Salt) 300,000Transport 70,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 550,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 20,000Materials (Salt) 300,000Transport 70,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 420,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MaterialsRock salt can be bought from rock salt dealers or at market places.

Work placeFor this enterprise a store of about 3x3 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe equipment can be found at local shops and markets. The equipment may include:• Hammer• Sacks• Weighing scale

MarketBlock salt is sold throughout the year and can be traded in the following areas:• Cattle keepers• Households• Market places• Trading centres

Opportunities• Expansion of business to cattle drugs• Expansion of business to cattle feed• Supplying contracts with cattle keepers• Village market days

Challenges• Physically demanding• Poor storage may lead to decay• Rain and high moisture may lead to decay

Information / Training Provider• Established salt sellers• Cattle keepers

Page 155: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

155Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about representing companies such as manufacturers, factories, wholesalers, retailers and service providers, who are interested in informing the public about their products and services. The promoter is paid for advertising and promot-ing the businesses, through announcements at public places and trading centres and using creative means to attract more customers.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000Transport 30,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 150,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 2,000Transport 30,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 52,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

SALES PROMOTIONSALES PROMOTION

MaterialsClients provide the information materials and sample products.

Work placeSales promotion is done at public places and trading centres. However a store of about 2x2 paces is needed.

EquipmentThe required equipment depends on the product and loca-tion and the following should be considered• Chair• Tent• Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business. All the promot-ers must have good communication skills and should be technical minded.

MarketThe market is found with manufacturers and trade per-sons • Manufacturing companies• Retail shops• Wholesale traders

Opportunities• Service contracts with big companies

Challenges• Competition• Labour demanding• Limited market in rural settings

Information / Training Provider• Advertising agent• Commercial institutes• Factories

Page 156: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own156

SAUCEPAN REPAIR SERVICEINTRODUCTIONThis business is about collecting old saucepans, which are no longer in use, and repairing them in such a way that they could be used again. It may be joining two saucepans to get one usable pan.

SAUCEPAN REPAIR SERVICE

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 50,000Materials 20,000Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 50,000Rent (open space and store) 20,000Total Amount 140,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials 30,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 55,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MaterialsThe materials are found in households, hotels, restaurants, etc.

Work placeFor this enterprise an open space of about 2x2 paces is needed with a small store of about 1x1 paces.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be bought from tool shops or markets and may include:• Chisels• Hammer• Metal cutter• Punches• Steel block

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business and should have the knowledge of metal smiting.

MarketThe market for saucepan repair is in rural and urban areas and can be performed in the following places• Hotels• Households• Market places• Restaurants• Trading centres

Opportunities• Make new saucepans• Repair for hotels and restaurants• Village market days

Challenges• Limited market• Materials are not readily available

Information / Training Provider• Established saucepan repairers• Saucepan manufacturing industries• Technical institutes

Page 157: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

157Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONA security service provides guards for a building, factory, or any kind of property. This service can be provided during the day, or at night. The guards must have training in self-defence and weapons use. Customers usually make payments on a monthly basis.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 40,000Transport 20,000Total Amount 60,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Transport 20,000Total Amount 25,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

SECURITY SERVICESECURITY SERVICE

Work placeThe client provides the workplace.

EquipmentOvercoats and boots can be found in shops and markets. Pangas, spears and other equipment needed for defending oneself are available at hardware shops or can even be manufactured locally.

PersonnelIdeally one person can do this work. However, the security service can be also done by a group.

MarketThe market for this service is throughout the year and can be offered to the following:• Hospitals• Hotels • Households• Offi ce building• Restaurants• Schools• Trading centres• Working places

Opportunities• Contract with hotels, schools, restaurants etc.• Register with a security fi rm

Challenges• First suspects if a robbery takes place• Risky• Low payment• Diffi cult to compete against big, established companies

Success StoryAs told by Opio of the Grand Imperial Hotel“I started working as a watchman in a private home in Muy-enga after failing to fi nd a proper job. In this place I worked for about two years. The salary was quite low, so I had to apply with a security fi rm, which hired and sent me for training. Afterwards I was permanently employed with a fair salary. I was on duty in bigger companies. I am now married and have two children, who go to a UPE school.”

Information / Training Provider• Guards• Policemen• Security fi rms

Page 158: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own158

SEEDLINGS TRADINGINTRODUCTIONThis business involves preparing soil, packing it in small-perforated bags and planting vegetable, fruit, fl ower and tree seeds in it. The seeds are watered and weeded and fi nally sold when they are big enough to be transplanted.

SEEDLINGS TRADING

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 30,000Materials (Seeds, Bags, Manure) 80,000Rent (Land) 50,000Utilities (Water) 20,000Total Amount 180,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials (Seeds, Bags, Manure) 80,000Rent 50,000Utilities (Water) 20,000Total Amount 160,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MaterialsSeeds are bought from agricultural shops and supermarkets. Some plants can be started from cuttings or saved from existing plants.

Work placeFor this enterprise a piece of land of about 10x10 paces with a shade and constant water supply is needed.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be bought from agricultural shops, hardware shops and markets places and may in-clude: • Hand hoe• Rake• Spade• Watering can / pipe

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business; all engaged in the planting process and should have the knowledge of nursing seedlings and controlling pests.

MarketThe market is throughout the year, but the peak is during rainy seasons. Seedlings can be sold in the following places• Agriculturists• Compound designers• Construction companies• Households

Opportunities• Obtain supply contracts• Offer different kinds of seedlings

Challenges• Affected by harsh weather conditions• Limited market

Information / Training Provider• Agriculture offi cers• Established businesses• Forestry departments

Page 159: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

159Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about fi xing shoe, it can involve sewing torn shoes, replacing soles and repairing all damages on all kind of shoes. The shoes mended by using gauze threads, needles, nails and super glue.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 50,000Materials 50,000Rent (store) 20,000Total Amount 120,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials 20,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 45,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

SHOE MENDING SHOE MENDING

MaterialsThe required materials can be found at leather shops and hardware shops.

Work placeFor this enterprise an area of about 2x2 paces is required, which can be under a veranda or shade on the street.

EquipmentThe required equipment is available at hardware shops and may include:• Cutting blade• Pair of scissors• Sewing needle• Small hammer• Glue • Nails

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business and should have the knowledge of mending shoes and good communica-tion skills.

MarketThe market in urban and rural areas is throughout the year and shoe mending can be done in the following places• Hotels• Households• Market places• Street vending• Trading centres

Opportunities• Contract with shoe companies• Expand business to shoe making• Expand to shoe polishing• Establish good reputation by providing quality service

Challenges• Competition• Loss of shoes due to theft• Low payment,especially in rural areas

Success Story“I have been working as a shoe mender for the last seven years. I began this business when I lost my job at the Entebbe International Airport. It was through hard work and loyal clients that I succeeded. A lot of customers are coming from govern-ment offi ces such as Ministry of Health and Agriculture. Due to my quality work, I have been able to have a good market here. I fully support my family with my business.”

Information / Training Provider• Established shoe menders• Shoe factories• Vocational training institutions

Page 160: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own160

SHOE SHINE SERVICEINTRODUCTIONA shoeshine service is the process of charging customers a fee to wash and polish shoes or simply polish shoes by using shoe brush and polish. The most commonly used method is to polish by hand. As well, shoe shiners are also dyeing shoes according to the requested colour.

SHOE SHINE SERVICE

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for shoe shine services 20,000Materials 20,000Utility (Water) 3,000Total Amount 43,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Maintenance of Equipment 3,000Materials 15,000Utility (Water) 3,000Total Amount 21,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MaterialsMaterials for this business can be obtained from local shops and markets.

Work placeShoeshine services are done on a veranda, in corridors and under shades. If possible a small room would be good for storage purposes.

EquipmentThe equipment for this business can be found at local shops or markets. The stools and benches are locally made by carpenters.• Bench• Brushes for different colours of shoes• Clothes for polishing• Pair of sandals• Stool• Polish

PersonnelOne person can run this business with the knowledge of shoe cleaning, polishing and at best dyeing.

MarketThe main markets for this business is around working places, restaurants, and households in urban areas.

Opportunities• High reputation due to quality work• Rainy days

Challenges• Market in rural settings may be limited• Bad weather may not allow shoes to dry• Loss of shoes may occur• Low rates due to high competition• Low payments

Success StoryAs told by Muzee Kato of Entebbe.“I was a porter at Entebbe International Airport until 1989 when I lost my job. For more than two years I was searching for a job. Then I started the shoeshine service. What helped me most was the fact that I was the only one doing this business in the centre of Entebbe town. I have been able to afford the school fees for my children from this income. I also used my savings to buy iron sheets for building a house. I have a good reputation that has helped me maintain my clients, such as Army Offi cers of the Entebbe State House and other departments. One challenge which I faced was the transfer of government ministries like Health and Agriculture so my income went down a bit.“

Information / Training Provider• Established shoe shiner

Page 161: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

161Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves designing, drawing, painting, and putting together signs, using lacquers, varnishes, paints and other materials. The signs can be used for displays, advertisements, and on buildings and other structures for private or commercial purposes.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000Materials 50,000Transport 50,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 240,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 50,000Transport 50,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 150,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

SIGN MAKINGSIGN MAKING

MaterialsThe paint is available from paint shops. The wood is avail-able from carpentry shops.

Work placeFor this enterprise a store and painting room of about 4x4 paces is needed.

EquipmentStencils and pencils are bought from stationary shops and the other equipment from hardware shops and may include:• Brushes• Cutters• Ladders• Pencils• Stencils

PersonnelIdeally three people can run this business and should have the knowledge and skills of art and design.

MarketThe market for sign making is throughout the year and it comprises of:• Business premises• Factories• Hospitals• Private individuals• Schools• Shops

Opportunities• Contracts with companies for providing billboards• Contracts for supplying banners

Challenges• Competition• High costs of some raw materials• Limited market in rural settings• Needs skill and attention

Information / Training Provider• Art and design schools• Established sign makers• Vocational training institutions

Page 162: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own162

STATIONARY SHOPINTRODUCTIONThis business is about selling items such as papers, envelopes, notebooks etc. Stationary shops buy these products in large quantities at a wholesale price and sell them in small quantities with a profi t margin. Stationary is important for schools, of-fi ces, companies etc.

STATIONARY SHOP

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 100,000Materials 200,000Rent 25,000Total Amount 325,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials 200,000Rent 25,000Total Amount 230,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MaterialsThe required materials can be bought from wholesalers of different traders / companies.

Work placeFor this enterprise a sales and storeroom of about 3x3 paces is required.

EquipmentThe equipment, mainly furniture, is locally made by carpen-ters and may include:• Counter• Display stands• Shelves• Working table

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business and should have be literate and have knowledge of different kinds of stationary.

MarketThe market for this business is throughout the year, but its peak is during school openings. • Companies• Governmental offi ces• Schools• Secretarial bureau• Working places

Opportunities• Good service to maintain loyal customers• Expansion to various materials • Stationary isn’t perishable• Long-term contracts with schools, companies, etc.• Long-term customers

Challenges• Competition, market may be saturated• Lack of space for storage• Limited market in rural areas

Information / Training Provider• Business schools• Established stationary shops• Institutions of learning

Page 163: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

163Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about buying sugar cane from farmers, cutting it into preferred sizes and selling it at different places. The com-monly used method for transporting the sugar cane is by wheel-barrow or bicycles.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 50,000Materials (Sugar cane) 20,000Total Amount 70,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials (Sugar cane) 40,000Total Amount 45,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

SUGAR CANE SELLINGSUGAR CANE SELLING

Work placeThere is no infrastructure required for the business and the stock can be kept at the business owners’ residence.

EquipmentThe required equipment is locally available in shops and markets and may include:• Cutting knife• Panga• Wooden wheel-barrow / Bicycle

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business. The person should be physically fi t in order to move with the stock the whole day and he should be able to identify good quality sugar cane.

MarketSugar cane sales are best in highly populated areas and may include:• Households• Market places• Schools• Street vending• Trading centres

Opportunities• Expand business to fruits / sugar cane juice• Provide quality sugar cane for wider market• Public gathering places or functions

Challenges• Labour demanding• Low earnings• Poor and long storage may lead to decay• Tiresome to move all day

Information / Training Provider• Agricultural schools• Sugar cane sellers

Page 164: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own164

TAILORING SCHOOLINTRODUCTIONThis business involves establishing and running a tailoring school. Students may be adults or youth not in school, either male or female. Teaching is done by experienced tailors/instructors who know how to design and mend clothes, using sewing machines. The instructors normally use paper materials and threads for teaching purposes. The students may tailor their own clothes ac-cording to their level of experience and materials, which are self-supplied. Courses can be obtained for a certain fees.

TAILORING SCHOOL

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 410,000Materials (Paper, bags) 50,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 500,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of store 20,000Materials (Paper, bags) 50,000Rent 40,000Total Amount 110,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MaterialsUsed newspaper or cement bags can be used as training material. One can get these from the markets and / or local shops. The threads and textile materials can be bought from local tailoring shops.

Work placeFor this vocational school a fl oor space of about 4x4 paces is needed.

EquipmentTailoring equipment can be bought from particular shops and these include:• Chairs • Drawing boards• Needles • Pair of scissors• Sewing machine • Tape measure• Flat Iron • Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and they should have teaching, tailoring and communication skills.

MarketThe business has a higher demand in urban areas and can be offered to the following people• Physically handicapped• Primary school leavers• School dropouts

Opportunities• Offering different types of training courses• Obtain training contracts• Open training centres in other places• Availability of employment after training

Challenges• Failure to pay the course fees• Limited market in rural areas• Limited source of materials• Trainees fi nd it diffi culty to gain employment after course

Information / Training Provider• Vocational institutes• Established tailoring training centres• Design institutes• Ministry of Education & Sports

Page 165: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

165Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about mending and making clothes for adults, children and babies both male and female. The commonly used tool for this activity is an electrical or manually driven sewing machine. A tailor can mend clothes and also make clothes out of used, as well as new material.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 250,000Materials 150,000Basic manpower training 150,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 580,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials 150,000Rent 30,000Total Amount 185,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

TAILORING SERVICETAILORING SERVICE

MaterialsSome clients bring in their own materials just for sewing or the required materials can be found in textile shops.

Work placeFor this enterprise a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed.

EquipmentTailoring equipment can be bought from particular shops and a working table can be made at a carpentry workshop. The equipment may include:• Hanging rail for display of materials• Needles• Pair of scissors• Sewing machine• Tape measure• Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business; both should have skills in tailoring and communication.

MarketThe business has a higher demand during festive seasons like Christmas and Easter. Tailored clothes can also be sold in the following places• Hotels• Households• Schools• Working places

Opportunities• Contract for making school uniforms• Contract for making uniforms for hotels, restaurants, motels• Offer all kinds of clothes for a larger market• Provide quality clothes for a wider market

Challenges• Failure to pay for the orders• Limited market for tailored clothes• Limited source of materials

Success StoryAs told by Namuddu Stella of Kitintale, Kampala.‘‘I dropped out of school in senior three because my mother could not afford my school fees anymore. I joined a vocational training institute and enrolled for tailoring. After graduation I got a sewing machine on a loan base and after a year I was able to pay the loan back. Today I support my family out of this business.”

Information / Training Provider• Design shops• Established businesses• Institutes for designing• Vocational training institutions

Page 166: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own166

TEA SERVICEINTRODUCTIONThis business involves making and selling tea. Making tea is the process of mixing water and milk in a large saucepan / kettle and then boiling it to get milk tea. Tea can also be made by just mixing water and tea leaves then boiling it for getting hot tea. Ingredients such as ginger, masala and sugar are added to give the tea a special taste. The rates are set per cup. The most commonly used method for heating tea is by using a charcoal stove or fi rewood.

TEA SERVICE

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for the tea service business 50,000Materials 30,000Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 50,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 150,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 2,000Materials 30,000Utility (Water, Charcoal, Firewood) 50,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 102,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MaterialsRaw materials for this business are available in shops and market places.

Work placeFor an enterprise a room of about 2x2 paces is needed which should have a clean water supply. However, tea can also be made in a stall or an open space.

EquipmentThe equipment needed can be bought in local shops or market and they may include:• Charcoal / fi re wood stove• Cups• Large saucepans / kettle• Working table

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business suffi ciently, where both are engaged in the production and sales. The personnel should ensure strict hygiene and the equipment should be washed with hot water.

MarketThis business normally takes place in the mornings at busy places such as:• Bus stations • Construction sites• Market places • Shopping centres• Taxi parks • Working places

Opportunities• Construction sites• Contracts to serve offi ces• Provide quality tea

Challenges• Constant heat• Maintaining good hygiene may be diffi cult• Limited market• Low turnover• Maintaining standards may be diffi cult• Quality consistency

Success StoryAs told by Grace of Owino market„I started selling tea in Owino market in 1996. I dropped out of school in class six and never went back to school since then. I just sat at home with nothing to do. I had an aunt who had a second -hand cloth business in Owino market. She introduced me to the tea business. I made tea every day and sold it at the market. The sales price of a cup was 100 Shillings. When I made some profi ts I started making chapatti, mandazis and samosas, which I sold in addition to my tea. This has expanded my business greatly. I am now married and have one child, which I am able to cater for. Now I am a proud owner of a stall at the market.“

Information / Training Provider• Established tea services• Family members• Market authorities

Page 167: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

167Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business is about providing public telephones as a communication service in remote or centre areas to other locations. It can be carried out within one region, to another region, inside the nation or even internationally. Conversations as well as messages can be exchanged through a telephone. A Telephone service is offered by providing cards or a handset from any of the phone companies within the country such as CELTEL, MTN, UTL, TELECEL etc., and the fee is calculated according to the consumed airtime.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for the telephone installation 300,000Materials (Airtime) 100,000Utilities (Electric power) 10,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 430,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials (Airtime) 100,000Utilities (Electric power) 10,000Rent 20,000Total Amount 140,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

TELEPHONE SERVICETELEPHONE SERVICE

MaterialsThe airtime cards are available from telephone companies and their agents.

Work placeFor this enterprise a space of about 2x2 paces is needed with electric power supply. However, telephone services can also be offered on verandas.

EquipmentA working table can be made by a carpentry workshop and telephone handsets can be found at supermarkets, elec-tronic companies or even at the telephone companies.

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business and should have the knowledge of handling telephones and basic book keeping.

MarketThe market in rural and urban setting is throughout the year with higher demand during festive seasons• Bus and Taxi parks• Market places• Trading centres• Working places

Opportunities• Expand market to internet / fax service• Fair price to attract customers

Challenges• Losses due to power cuts / black outs• Network problems

Success StoryAs told by Nakanwagi Juliet of Entebbe.“About two years ago I started my business by offering telephone services in Entebbe town. My fi rst telephone was an Ericson model at 150,000 Shillings. At that time I used to charge 600 Shillings per minute. As a result of my monopoly, I made high profi ts and used this amount to acquire a modern telephone. Today I have two more phones and now I charge 400 Shillings per minute, which enables me to earn even more because it is cheaper now and more people can afford it. My income is enough to cater for my needs and that of my baby.”

Information / Training Provider• Phone companies• Phone dealers• Established phone services

Page 168: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own168

TRADITIONAL SANDAL MAKINGINTRODUCTIONThis business is about making traditional sandals for sale, which can be made out of leather, rubber, used car tires and wood. The materials are cut into the required shapes and joined by using threads, small nails and glue.

TRADITIONAL SANDAL MAKING

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 20,000Materials 20,000Rent (shade) 15,000Total Amount 55,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Materials 20,000Rent 15,000Total Amount 40,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MaterialsAll the required materials are locally available. Leather can be found at tanneries, whereas the used tires can be obtained free of cost.

Work placeFor this business a fl oor space of about 3x3 paces is needed. Traditionally sandals are made under shades and then taken to the market for sale.

EquipmentThe required equipment can be found in shops and market place. The working table can be manufactured by carpentry workshop. The equipment includes:• Needles• Small hammer• Working table• Thread• Glue• Nails

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and should have the knowledge of sandal making.

MarketMarket for sandals are in rural as well as urban areas and they can be sold in the following places:• Curio shops• Market places• Street vending

Opportunities• Contracts for supplying curio shops• Exhibitions and trade fares• Increasing variety of quality sandals• Tourists

Challenges• Competition with imported sandals• Limited market• Poor quality of raw materials causes short life span of sandals

Information / Training Provider• Curio shops• Established traditional sandal makers

Page 169: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

169Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThis business involves collecting different kinds of seeds, preparing soil and planting these seeds with soil in small polythene bags. These seeds are watered and cared for. When they sprout they are placed at nurseries. The tree seedlings are sprayed and monitored until they are ready for transplanting to a permanent ground where they can fully grow and after some time sold. Trees can be used for building, charcoal burning, furniture making, etc.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 100,000Materials (Seeds, Bags, Manure) 40,000Utilities (Water) 20,000Total Amount 160,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 4,000Materials (Seeds, Bags, Manure) 40,000Utilities (Water) 20,000Total Amount 64,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

TREE PLANTINGTREE PLANTING

Work placeFor this enterprise a plot of land with regular water supply of about one acre is needed.

Equipment• Polythene bags• Hand hoe• Panga• Watering can / pipes• Spade• Shovels

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business and they should have the knowledge of forestry.

MarketThe market is throughout the year and can be sold at the following places:• Carpentry workshops• Construction sites• Firewood sellers• Hotels• Municipality• Recreation centres

Opportunities• Contract for supplying construction sites• Expand business to fruit growing• Offering different kinds of trees• Supply other wood users

Challenges• Affected by harsh weather conditions• Labour demanding• Limited market• Takes long for earnings• Takes long to mature

Information / Training Provider• Agriculture offi cers• Established businesses• Forestry department

Page 170: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own170

VIDEO THEATREINTRODUCTIONA video theatre is a place where fi lms are shown and viewers pay a certain fee for the service. The chosen videotape is inserted into a video player, which is connected with a television screen for showing the fi lm. The video player and the television screen need an electric power supply. Football matches, sports events, music shows and dramas can also be shown in a video theatre.

VIDEO THEATRE

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 450,000Materials 30,000Utilities (Electricity) 20,000Transport 20,000Rent 60,000Total Amount 580,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 10,000Materials 30,000Utilities (Electricity) 20,000Transport 20,000Rent 60,000Total Amount 140,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

MaterialsVideotapes are available in video libraries or can be acquired from supermarkets, or video shops.

Work placeFor this business a fl oor space of about 6x6 paces is needed. The building should have constant electric power supply.

EquipmentThe video player and the television can be bought from electronic shops, whereas the benches and the working table can be made at a carpentry workshop.

PersonnelIdeally two people can run this business. They should be able to identify the preference of their clients according to their age groups.

MarketThe market is throughout the year and there is a higher demand during the holidays.• Market places• Residential areas• Youth centres

Opportunities• Obtain request from families to show their videos from relatives abroad• Increase shows during public holidays• Rent out the videos to individuals• Serve snacks and sodas during the show against a payment• Have comfortable seats to sit in to watch the video

Challenges• Low rates are expected in rural settings• Electric power supply limited during day time• Power cuts may damage the electronic equipment

Information / Training Provider• Cinemas • Theatres• Video libraries

Page 171: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

171Start Your OwnSERVICE

INTRODUCTIONThe watch maintenance and repair service is about fi xing broken watches for a fee. This could include amending the engine, exchanging the cell or even fi xing new straps. The watch maintenance and repair service also involves the sale of new cells, watch batteries and different kinds of straps.

Start up costsDescription Amount Ush.

Basic equipment for this business 40,000Rent (veranda) 10,000Materials 200,000Total Amount 250,000

Running costsDescription Amount Ush.

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Rent 10,000Materials 200,000Total Amount 215,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

WATCH MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR SERVICEWATCH MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR SERVICE

MaterialsThe required materials can be found at watch shops in urban areas or even in supermarkets.

Work placeFor this business a fl oor space of about 2x2 paces is re-quired. However the watch maintenance and repair service can be also done on verandas or under a tree.

EquipmentThe equipment is available in watch shops and they may include:• Nuts• Pins• Set of small screwdrivers• Small microscope

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business and should have the knowledge of maintaining and repairing watches.

MarketThe market is throughout the year.• Market places• Street vending• Trading centres

Opportunities• Provide quality service• Provide better services for a better reputation• Sell quality straps• Maintain good reputation to increase the number of loyal customers

Challenges• Market is limited in rural settings• Obtaining spare parts may be diffi cult• Training opportunities are limited

Success StoryAs told by Muzee Richard of Channel Street Kampala.“I moved to Uganda in the 60s and joined the Gombe Technical Institute. After that I worked for a watch shop, owned by an Asian. Due to various incidents such as war, looting, the shop with all its property was lost and the Asian left the country. At that time I established my own watch repair service at Channel Street where I am still working till date. My shop is just opposite the old taxi park. I have been here for almost 15 years and I believe that I am the oldest watch repairer in the town. I am well known for my good work and service. Based on my earnings I have been able to support my family back in Kenya. My children are grown up and they are now working in different places.”

Information / Training Provider• Technical institutes• Established watch repairers

Page 172: AGRICULTURE BUSINESS MANUFACTURING / PROCESSING …6 Start Your Own BASIC INFORMATION 1 INTRODUCTION Many of us, at some point in our lives, think about owning our own business. Perhaps

B U S I N E S S

No

tes

B U S I N E S SW H A T Y O U N E E D

SERVICEStart Your Own172

WATER SUPPLY SERVICEINTRODUCTIONThis business is about supplying customers with fresh water. Fresh water is gathered from springs, wells, rivers or even lakes by using buckets or other containers and fi lling it into jerry cans. The jerry cans are then transported by means of wheel-barrows or bicycles to consumers such as households, construction sites, and restaurants etc.

WATER SUPPLY SERVICE

Start up costsDescription Amount

Basic equipment for this business 50,000Total Amount 50,000

Running costsDescription Amount

Repair and maintenance of equipment 5,000Total Amount 5,000

*These are estimations for one month and may vary from one month to another

Source of waterWater can be fetched from springs, wells, rivers, hand pumps, etc.

EquipmentA wheel-barrow can be bought from a hardware shop or even made by a carpentry workshop. Jerry cans and other fetching equipment is available at local shops and markets. The equipment may include:• Containers• Jerry cans• Rope• Tins• Wheel-barrow / bicycle

PersonnelIdeally one person can run this business.

MarketWater can be sold at the following places• Animal farms• Construction sites• Households• Lodges• Restaurants

Opportunities• Contract to supply construction sites• Contract to supply hotels, households, restaurants, etc.

Challenges• Limited market in rural setting• Low earning due to low profi t margins

Success StoryAs told by Matovu David of Kikaula, Lugazi town council.“Since four years I am involved in the water supply business. The community assisted me with a loan of about 50,000 Shillings, so that I could buy a wheel-barrow and four jerry cans. At that time we used to sell a jerry can for about 50 Shillings whereas today it is about 200 Shillings. Per day I have an income of about 10,000 Shillings. By the end of the month this amount is enough to cater for my rent and other needs. I have plans to do another business such as opening a small grocery shop.”

Information / Training Provider• Established water suppliers• Water authorities